WO2015040984A1

WO2015040984A1 - Liquid crystal display device, and manufacturing method therefor

Info

Publication number: WO2015040984A1
Application number: PCT/JP2014/071323
Authority: WO
Inventors: 芝原　靖司; 幹司宮川; 俊一諏訪; 親司小林
Original assignee: ソニー株式会社
Priority date: 2013-09-20
Filing date: 2014-08-12
Publication date: 2015-03-26
Also published as: TW201518822A; TWI655483B

Abstract

A liquid crystal display device which comprises a liquid crystal display element that has: a first alignment film (21) and a second alignment film (51) that are provided to opposing surface sides of a pair of substrates (20, 50); and a liquid crystal layer (70) that is disposed between the first alignment film (21) and the second alignment film (51), and contains liquid crystal molecules (71) having negative dielectric anisotropy. At least the first alignment film (21) contains a compound that has been polymerised, deformed, or crosslinked by a polymer compound having a first side chain and a second side chain. The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerisable functional group, or a photosensitive functional group. The second side chain has a structure inducing dielectric anisotropy, and has a structure inducing vertical alignment. Pretilt is applied to the liquid crystal molecules by the first alignment film.

Description

Liquid crystal display device and manufacturing method thereof

The present disclosure relates to a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display element in which a liquid crystal layer is sealed between a pair of substrates having alignment films on opposite surfaces, and a method for manufacturing the liquid crystal display device.

In recent years, a liquid crystal display (LCD) is often used as a display monitor for liquid crystal television receivers, notebook personal computers, car navigation systems, and the like. This liquid crystal display is classified into various display modes (methods) according to the molecular arrangement (orientation) of liquid crystal molecules contained in a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between substrates. As a display mode, for example, a TN (Twisted Nematic) mode in which liquid crystal molecules are twisted and aligned without applying a voltage is well known. In the TN mode, the liquid crystal molecules have a property of positive dielectric anisotropy, that is, the dielectric constant in the major axis direction of the liquid crystal molecules is larger than that in the minor axis direction. For this reason, the liquid crystal molecules have a structure that is aligned in a direction perpendicular to the substrate surface while sequentially rotating the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules in a plane parallel to the substrate surface.

On the other hand, attention has been focused on a VA (Vertical Alignment) mode in which liquid crystal molecules are aligned perpendicularly to the substrate surface without applying a voltage. In the VA mode, the liquid crystal molecules have a negative dielectric anisotropy, that is, the property that the dielectric constant in the major axis direction of the liquid crystal molecules is smaller than that in the minor axis direction, and a wider viewing angle than in the TN mode. Can be realized.

In such a VA mode liquid crystal display, when a voltage is applied, liquid crystal molecules aligned in a direction perpendicular to the substrate are inclined in a direction parallel to the substrate due to negative dielectric anisotropy. It is the structure which permeate | transmits light by responding to. However, since the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules aligned in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is tilted is arbitrary, the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules is disturbed by the application of a voltage, thereby deteriorating the response characteristics to the voltage.

Therefore, in order to improve the response characteristics, a technique for regulating the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules fall in response to the voltage has been studied. Specifically, a technique for applying a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules (photo-alignment) using an alignment film formed by irradiating ultraviolet light from an oblique direction to the linearly polarized light of the ultraviolet light or the substrate surface. Membrane technology). As a photo-alignment film technology, for example, a film made of a polymer containing a chalcone structure is irradiated with ultraviolet light from a linearly polarized light or an ultraviolet light from an oblique direction to the substrate surface, and a double bond portion in the chalcone structure A technique for forming an alignment film by cross-linking is known (see Patent Documents 1 to 3). In addition, there is a technique for forming an alignment film using a mixture of a vinyl cinnamate derivative polymer and polyimide (see Patent Document 4). Furthermore, a technique for forming an alignment film by irradiating a film containing polyimide with linearly polarized light having a wavelength of 254 nm to decompose a part of the polyimide (see Patent Document 5) is also known. As a peripheral technology of photo-alignment film technology, it is composed of a liquid crystalline polymer compound on a film made of a polymer containing a dichroic photoreactive structural unit such as an azobenzene derivative irradiated with linearly polarized light or oblique light. There is also a technique for forming a liquid crystal alignment film by forming a film (see Patent Document 6).

A liquid crystal display element having a pair of alignment films provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and a liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules having a negative dielectric anisotropy provided between the pair of alignment films. With
At least one of the pair of alignment films includes a compound in which a polymer compound having a crosslinkable functional group as a side chain is crosslinked or deformed, and the liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by the crosslinked or deformed compound. Is known from JP2011-095696A.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-087859 JP-A-10-252646 JP 2002-082336 A Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-232400 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-073821 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-326638 JP 2011-095696 A

However, although the above-described photo-alignment film technology improves response characteristics, when forming the alignment film, a device that irradiates light of linearly polarized light or a device that irradiates light from an oblique direction with respect to the substrate surface. There is a problem that a light irradiation device is required. In order to realize a wider viewing angle, a larger-scale device is required to manufacture a multi-domain liquid crystal display in which a plurality of sub-pixels are provided in a pixel and the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is divided. In addition, the manufacturing process becomes complicated. Specifically, in a liquid crystal display having a multi-domain, an alignment film is formed so that the pretilt is different for each sub-pixel. Therefore, in the case of using the above-described photo-alignment film technology in the manufacture of a liquid crystal display having a multi-domain, since light is emitted for each sub-pixel, a mask pattern for each sub-pixel is required, and the light irradiation device is large. Become. Further, with the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-095696, response characteristics can be improved. However, when a liquid crystal display device is manufactured, a pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules by applying a voltage to the pixel electrode and the counter electrode provided in the liquid crystal display device, but there is a demand for further lowering the applied voltage. There is.

Therefore, an object of the present disclosure is to provide a liquid crystal display element that can easily improve response characteristics without using a large-scale manufacturing apparatus, and to further apply a voltage applied when pretilt is applied to liquid crystal molecules. It is an object of the present invention to provide a liquid crystal display device and a method for manufacturing the same that can reduce the voltage of the display.

The liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect of the present disclosure for achieving the above object is as follows.
A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film is a compound in which a polymer compound having a first side chain and a second side chain (referred to as “pre-alignment treatment / compound” for convenience) is crosslinked, polymerized, or deformed (for convenience, “alignment treatment”). Called “post-compound”),
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure), or alternatively
The second side chain has a range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction (preferably a range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 60 degrees from its major axis direction, more preferably Dipole moment within the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 40 degrees from the major axis direction, and more preferably within the range of angles greater than 0 degree and less than 30 degrees from the major axis direction. And having a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the second aspect of the present disclosure), or
The second side chain has the following structural formula (11) (the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure),
The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by the first alignment film. Here, the “crosslinkable functional group” means a group capable of forming a crosslinked structure (crosslinked structure), and more specifically means dimerization. Further, “polymerizable functional group” means a functional group in which two or more functional groups sequentially polymerize. Furthermore, the “photosensitive functional group” means a group capable of absorbing energy rays. Examples of energy rays include ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and electron beams. The same applies to the following.

Here, in the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure,
(A) m and n are each independently 0 or 1,
(B) each ring R independently represents a phenylene group, a cycloalkylene group, a phenylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or a cycloalkylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
(C) Ring X represents a phenylene group or a cycloalkylene group,
With respect to (d) A _4,
A group consisting of fluorine atom, chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF ₃ , —OCHF ₂ , —CF ₃ , —CHF ₂ , —CH ₂ F, —OCF ₂ CHF ₂ , and —OCF ₂ CHFCF ₃ A group,
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is a second group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the second group, any non-adjacent — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as the third group, provided that the alkyl group in the third group is Any non-adjacent — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fourth group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the fourth group, any non-adjacent — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fifth group, provided that the alkyl group in the fifth group is Any non-adjacent — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
(D-1) All of A ₁ , A ₂ , A ₃ are hydrogen atoms and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or m = n When = 1, A ₄ is one kind of atom or group selected from the first group or the second group,
(D-2) When A ₃ is a hydrogen atom and m = 0 and n = 0, A ₄ is one kind of group selected from the fourth group,
(D-3) When at least one of A ₁ , A ₂ , A ₃ is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or , M = n = 1, A ₄ is a hydrogen atom, one kind of atom or group selected from the first group, the second group and the third group,
(D-4) When A ₃ is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and m = 0 and n = 0, A ₄ is selected from a hydrogen atom, the first group, the fourth group, and the fifth group One kind of atom or group.

In the structural formula (11), the ring R and the ring X are portions that can be along the core portion of the liquid crystal molecule, and A ₄ is a portion that is along the terminal chain of the liquid crystal molecule.

In the method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure described below, the step of aligning liquid crystal molecules by applying a predetermined electric field is performed on at least one substrate. In a state where an alignment film containing an alignment control material is formed on the surface and the electrode, the liquid crystal layer is allowed to react while applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer, thereby aligning liquid crystal molecules and imparting a pretilt. It consists of a process. Such a liquid crystal display manufacturing method is called an FPA method (Field-induced Photo-reactive Alignment method).

A method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure (or a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display element) for achieving the above object is as follows.
From a polymer compound having a first side chain and a second side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group on one of a pair of substrates (referred to as “pre-alignment treatment compound” for convenience) After forming the first alignment film and forming the second alignment film on the other of the pair of substrates,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Crosslinking or polymerizing the first side chain of the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules;
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain has the above structural formula (11).

A method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the second aspect of the present disclosure (or a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display element) for achieving the above object is as follows.
A first alignment film comprising a polymer compound having a first side chain having a photosensitive functional group and a second side chain on one of a pair of substrates (for convenience, referred to as “pre-alignment treatment compound”) After forming the second alignment film on the other of the pair of substrates,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
The first side chain in the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) is deformed to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules.
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain has the above structural formula (11).

A method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure (or a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display element) for achieving the above object is as follows.
From a polymer compound having a first side chain and a second side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a photosensitive functional group on one of a pair of substrates (referred to as “pre-alignment treatment compound” for convenience) After forming the first alignment film and forming the second alignment film on the other of the pair of substrates,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
The polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) is irradiated with energy rays to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules.
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain has the above structural formula (11).

In the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect to the second aspect of the present disclosure, or alternatively, the first of the present disclosure for manufacturing the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect to the second aspect of the present disclosure. In the method for producing a liquid crystal display device according to the third to third aspects, the second side chain is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF ₃ , —OCHF ₂ , —CF ₃ , —CHF ₂ , —CH. Any of ₂ F, —OCF ₂ CHF ₂ , and —OCF ₂ CHFCF ₃ may be included.

In the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure, the second side chain may have the following structural formula (12). Alternatively, the second side chain can have a form having the following structural formula (13). In this case, the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded. In Structural Formula (12) and Structural Formula (13), Ring R and Ring X are portions that can be along the core portion of the liquid crystal molecule, and A ₄ is a portion that is along the end chain of the liquid crystal molecule. .

here,
(E) A ₀ is an alkylene group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NHCO—, —CONH—, or an alkylene-ether group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms. Furthermore, an alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NHCO—, —CONH—, or an alkylene-ether group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms Preferably there is.

A ₀₁ represents a linear or branched divalent organic group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 3 to 12 carbon atoms, which may contain an ether group or an ester group; Represents at least one linking group selected from the group consisting of ester, ether ester, acetal, ketal, hemiacetal, and hemiketal, and is a polymer compound or a crosslinked compound (before or after alignment treatment, compound) It is bound to the main chain. A ₀₁ is preferably flexible before the alignment treatment and in the compound before the alignment treatment.

Further, A ₀₂ is a site having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. As described above, this crosslinkable functional group or polymerizable functional group may be a group that forms a crosslinked structure by a photoreaction or a group that forms a crosslinked structure by a thermal reaction. Specifically, as A _02, as a photodimerized photosensitive group which is a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group (photosensitive functional group), for example, chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol, Chitosan can be mentioned. Also. Examples of the polymerizable functional group include a divalent group containing any one of acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, epoxy, and oxetane, or an ethynylene group.

In the side chain in which the first side chain and the second side chain represented by the structural formula (13) are bonded (hereinafter referred to as “bonded side chain” for the sake of convenience), the reaction site crosslinked or polymerized is represented by the structural formula (13 A ₀₂ (although in), after the reaction) is equivalent. The terminal structure portion corresponds to the ring R, ring X, and A ₄ in the structural formula (13). Here, in the compound after the alignment treatment, the main chain and the first side chain are bonded to each other, for example, the cross-linked portions in the two bonded side chains extending from the main chain are cross-linked to each other, A part of the liquid crystal molecules is sandwiched between the terminal structure part extending from the first part and the terminal structure part extending from the other bridging part, and the terminal structure part is predetermined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt. Such a state is shown in the conceptual diagram of FIG. Further, specific examples of the binding side chain in which the first side chain and the second side chain represented by the structural formula (13) are combined include, for example, the following formulas (G-K01) to (G-K12) The monovalent group etc. which are represented by these can be mentioned.

The structure that induces vertical alignment in the second side chain refers to a structure having the ability to align liquid crystal molecules perpendicularly to the substrate, and the structure is not limited as long as it has this ability. Examples of structures having the ability to align liquid crystal molecules vertically with respect to the substrate include, for example, long-chain alkyl groups, long-chain fluoroalkyl groups, cyclic groups having terminal alkyl groups, fluoroalkyl groups, alkoxyl groups, and steroids. A group, a structure in which two or three cyclic groups are linked, a steroid group, and the like are known, and can be suitably used in the present disclosure. Examples of the cyclic group include a phenylene group and a cyclohexylene group, and a structure having 2 to 3 linkages is preferable. The linked structure may be a phenylene group alone, a cyclohexylene group alone, or a combination of both. Specifically, structural formula (11) can be given. In addition, when the structure that constitutes the fourth group or the fifth group constituting A ₄ described above and corresponds to the above-described structure having the ability to orient vertically, only the structure that constitutes the fourth group or the fifth group is used. In some cases, vertical alignment is induced. These groups may be directly bonded to the main chain of polyamic acid or polyimide as long as the liquid crystal molecules have the ability to align perpendicularly to the substrate, and via an appropriate bonding group. It may be bonded. The structure that induces dielectric anisotropy specifically includes fluorine atom, chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF ₃ , —OCHF ₂ , —CF ₃ , —CHF ₂ , —CH ₂ F, —OCF _2. A group such as CHF ₂ or —OCF ₂ CHFCF ₃ is applicable.

More specifically, as “A ₄ ”, an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxyalkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkoxyalkoxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, Examples thereof include an alkenyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxyalkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and an alkoxyalkenyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. However, when m = n = 0, the alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, the alkoxy group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, the alkoxyalkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, the alkoxyalkoxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, the carbon number Examples thereof include an alkenyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxy group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an alkenyloxyalkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, and an alkoxyalkenyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms. As the alkyl group, —CH ₃ , —C ₂ H ₅ , —C ₃ H ₇ , —C ₄ H ₉ , —C ₅ H ₁₁ , —C ₆ H ₁₃ , —C ₇ H ₁₅ , —C ₈ H ₁₇ , —C ₉ H ₁₉ and —C ₁₀ H ₂₁ can be mentioned, and as the alkoxy group, —OCH ₃ , —OC ₂ H ₅ , —OC ₃ H ₇ , —OC ₄ H ₉ , —OC ₅ H ₁₁ , -OC ₆ H ₁₃ , -OC ₇ H ₁₅ , -OC ₈ H ₁₇ and -OC ₉ H ₁₉ can be mentioned.

In the method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device (or a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display element) according to the first aspect of the present disclosure, the liquid crystal layer is aligned by applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer, while the energy is aligned. The first side chain of the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) can be crosslinked or polymerized by irradiating the wire or by heating.

In this case, it is preferable to irradiate the energy lines while applying an electric field to the liquid crystal layer so that the liquid crystal molecules are arranged in an oblique direction with respect to the surface of at least one of the pair of substrates. The pair of substrates includes a substrate having a pixel electrode and a substrate having a counter electrode, and it is more preferable to irradiate energy rays from the substrate having the pixel electrode. In general, a color filter layer is formed on the substrate side having the counter electrode, and energy rays are absorbed by this color filter layer, and the reaction of the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group of the alignment film material may be difficult to occur. Therefore, as described above, it is more preferable to irradiate the energy beam from the substrate side having the pixel electrode on which the color filter layer is not formed. When the color filter layer is formed on the substrate side having the pixel electrode, it is preferable to irradiate energy rays from the substrate side having the counter electrode. Basically, the azimuth angle (deflection angle) of the liquid crystal molecules when pretilt is applied is defined by the strength and direction of the electric field and the molecular structure of the alignment film material, and the polar angle (zenith angle) is It is defined by the strength of the electric field and the molecular structure of the alignment film material. The same applies to the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device according to the second to third aspects of the present disclosure.

In the method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device (or the method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display element) according to the second aspect of the present disclosure, the liquid crystal layer is aligned by applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer, while the energy is aligned. The first side chain of the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) may be deformed by irradiation with a line.

In the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure, the polymer compound is irradiated with ultraviolet rays as energy rays while aligning liquid crystal molecules by applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer. It can be set as a form to do.

A pretilt is imparted by the first alignment film (after the alignment treatment / by the compound) (first pretilt angle θ ₁ ), and the liquid crystal molecules are preferably pretilted by the second alignment film (after the alignment treatment / by the compound). (Second pretilt angle θ ₂ ). The first pretilt angle θ ₁ and the second pretilt angle θ ₂ have values greater than 0 degrees. Here, the pretilts θ ₁ and θ ₂ may be the same angle (θ ₁ = θ ₂ ) or different angles (θ ₁ ≠ θ ₂ ), but are preferably different angles. . Thus, the pre-tilt theta _1, than if both theta ₂ is 0 degrees, thereby improving the response speed to application of the driving voltage, approximately equal to the case pretilt theta _1, both of the theta ₂ is 0 degrees Contrast can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of light transmitted during black display while improving the response characteristics, and to improve the contrast. When the pretilts θ ₁ and θ ₂ are set to different angles, it is more desirable that the larger pretilt θ of the pretilts θ ₁ and θ ₂ is not less than 1 degree and not more than 4 degrees. A particularly high effect can be obtained by setting the larger pretilt θ within such an angle range.

In the liquid crystal display device according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure including the preferred embodiments described above, and the method for manufacturing the liquid crystal display device according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure, the liquid crystal molecules The pretilt is imparted by the first alignment film. Specifically, the pretilt imparted to the liquid crystal molecules is mainly held by the first side chain, or is fixed, and the second side The chain promotes the application of pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, and the applied voltage when applying the pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules can be reduced.

Hereinafter, the liquid crystal display devices according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure including the preferable modes and configurations described above may be simply referred to simply as “liquid crystal display devices of the present disclosure”. The manufacturing methods of the liquid crystal display device according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure including the preferred embodiments described above are collectively referred to simply as “the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure”. Hereinafter, the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure and the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure may be collectively referred to simply as “the present disclosure”.

In the present disclosure, the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) or the compound constituting the first alignment film (after alignment treatment / compound) has a group represented by the following formula (1) as the first side chain. It can be set as the structure which has. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first configuration of the present disclosure” for convenience.

-R ₁ '-R ₂ ' -R ₃ '(1)
Here, R ₁ ′ is a linear or branched divalent organic group having 1 or more carbon atoms, which may contain an ether group or an ester group. R ₁ ′ is at least one selected from the group consisting of ethers, esters, ether esters, acetals, ketals, hemiacetals and hemiketals. And is bonded to the main chain of a polymer compound or a crosslinked compound (before or after alignment treatment), and R ₂ ′ is a divalent organic compound containing a plurality of ring structures. a group, one of the atoms constituting the ring structure 'is bonded to, R _3' R ₁ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, having a carbonate group A monovalent group, or a derivative thereof.

Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) or the compound constituting the first alignment film (after the alignment treatment / compound) has the group represented by the formula (2) as the first side chain. It can be set as the structure which consists of a compound which has as. Such a configuration is referred to as a “second configuration of the present disclosure” for convenience. The polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) or the compound constituting the first alignment film (after alignment treatment / compound) is represented not only by the group represented by formula (2) but also by the above-described formula (1). And a compound having a group represented by the formula (2) as the first side chain.

-R ₁₁ '-R ₁₂ ' -R ₁₃ '-R ₁₄ ' (2)
Here, R ₁₁ ′ is an organic group which may contain a linear or branched divalent ether group or ester group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 3 to 12 carbon atoms. Yes, and bonded to the main chain of the polymer compound or the crosslinked compound (before or after the alignment treatment or after the alignment treatment), or R ₁₁ ′ is ether, ester, ether ester, acetal, ketal, It is at least one linking group selected from the group consisting of hemiacetal and hemiketal, and is bonded to the main chain of a polymer compound or a crosslinked compound (before or after alignment treatment / compound), R ₁₂ ', for example, chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol, chitosan, A Acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, divalent group comprising any one of the structures of epoxy and oxetane, or an ethynylene group, R ₁₃ 'is a divalent organic group containing a plurality of ring structures , R ₁₄ ′ is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a monovalent group having a carbonate group, or a derivative thereof. In some cases, equation (2) can be transformed as equation (2 ′) below. That is, Formula (2) includes Formula (2 ′).
-R ₁₁ '-R ₁₂ ' -R ₁₄ '(2')

Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the first alignment film includes a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the first substrate. (Where the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded to the main chain), and a cross-linked part in which a part of the first side chain is cross-linked, and a cross-linked part It is comprised from the terminal structure part couple | bonded and it can be set as the structure by which a pretilt is provided by liquid crystal molecules being along a 2nd side chain or being pinched | interposed into a 2nd side chain. Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the first alignment film includes a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the first substrate. (Where the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded to the main chain), and a deformed part in which a part of the first side chain is deformed, and a deformed part It is comprised from the terminal structure part couple | bonded and it can be set as the structure by which a pretilt is provided by liquid crystal molecules being along a 2nd side chain or being pinched | interposed into a 2nd side chain. Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the first alignment film includes a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the first substrate. (Wherein the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded to the main chain), and a part of the first side chain is crosslinked or deformed, and The liquid crystal molecules are composed of a terminal structure unit bonded to the bridge / deformation unit, and the liquid crystal molecules are provided with a pretilt along the second side chain or sandwiched between the second side chain. Can do. These configurations are referred to as a “third configuration of the present disclosure” for convenience. The first side chain and the second side chain may be bonded to the same main chain, or may be bonded to two or more different main chains. Moreover, the 1st side chain and the 2nd side chain may couple | bond together.

Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the first alignment film includes a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the first substrate. (Where the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded to the main chain), and a cross-linked part in which a part of the first side chain is cross-linked, and a cross-linked part It can be set as the structure comprised from the terminal structure part which couple | bonds and has a mesogenic group. The main chain and the cross-linked part are bonded by a covalent bond, and the cross-linked part and the terminal structure part can be bonded by a covalent bond. Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the first alignment film includes a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the first substrate. (Where the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded to the main chain), and a deformed part in which a part of the first side chain is deformed, and a deformed part It can be set as the structure comprised from the terminal structure part which couple | bonds and has a mesogenic group. Alternatively, in the present disclosure, the first alignment film includes a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the first substrate. (Wherein the first side chain and the second side chain are bonded to the main chain), and a part of the first side chain is crosslinked or deformed, and Further, it can be configured to be composed of a terminal structure portion having a mesogenic group bonded to a cross-linked / deformed portion. These configurations are referred to as “fourth configuration of the present disclosure” for convenience. Here, the first side chain and the second side chain may be bonded to the same main chain, or may be bonded to different main chains. Moreover, the 1st side chain and the 2nd side chain may couple | bond together.

In the present disclosure including the first configuration of the present disclosure to the fourth configuration of the present disclosure, the first side chain (more specifically, the cross-linking portion) has a form having a photodimerized photosensitive group. Can do.

Furthermore, in the present disclosure including the preferable configurations and forms described above, the surface roughness Ra of the first alignment film may be 1 nm or less. Here, the surface roughness Ra is defined in JIS B 0601: 2001.

Furthermore, in the present disclosure including the preferred configurations and forms described above, an alignment regulating portion composed of a slit formed in the electrode or an alignment regulating portion composed of a protrusion provided on the substrate is provided. In addition, an electrode provided with uneven portions can be used.

Furthermore, in the present disclosure including the preferred configurations and forms described above, as described above, the second alignment film is composed of a polymer compound (compound before alignment treatment) constituting the first alignment film, or It can be set as the form which has the same composition as a 1st alignment film. However, the second alignment film constitutes the first alignment film as long as it is composed of the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) defined in the liquid crystal display devices according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure. It is good also as a structure which consists of a high molecular compound (before alignment process and compound) different from the high molecular compound (before alignment process and compound) to perform. Alternatively, the second alignment film may be composed of a polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) different from the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) constituting the first alignment film.

In the present disclosure including the preferred configurations and forms described above, the main chain may be configured to include an imide bond in the repeating unit. The polymer compound (after alignment treatment / compound) includes a structure in which liquid crystal molecules are aligned in a predetermined direction with respect to a pair of substrates, that is, not only the first substrate but also the second substrate. It can be in the form. Further, the pair of substrates is configured from a substrate having a pixel electrode and a substrate having a counter electrode, that is, the first substrate is a substrate having a pixel electrode, and the second substrate is a substrate having a counter electrode. Alternatively, the second substrate may be a substrate having a pixel electrode, and the first substrate may be a substrate having a counter electrode.

The substrate having the pixel electrode (first substrate) is provided with a circuit for driving a pixel such as a TFT. A layer including a circuit for driving a pixel such as a TFT may be referred to as a “TFT layer”. When the color filter layer is formed on the substrate (second substrate) side having the counter electrode, the smoothing film is formed on the TFT layer, and the first electrode is formed on the smoothing film. . On the other hand, when the color filter layer is formed on the substrate (first substrate) side having the pixel electrode, the color filter layer is formed on the TFT layer, and the color filter layer is formed on the color filter layer. A first electrode is formed on the overcoat layer formed on the layer or on a passivation film made of an inorganic material. In a liquid crystal display device, when a pixel includes a plurality of subpixels, the pixel may be read as a subpixel. What is necessary is just to comprise the 1st electrode and the 2nd electrode from the transparent conductive material which has transparency, such as ITO (indium tin oxide), IZO, ZnO, SnO, for example. The second electrode can be a so-called solid electrode (an electrode that is not patterned). For example, a first polarizing plate is attached to the outer surface of the first substrate, and a second polarizing plate is attached to the outer surface of the second substrate. The first polarizing plate and the second polarizing plate are arranged so that their absorption axes are orthogonal to each other. The absorption axis of the first polarizing plate is preferably parallel to the X axis or Y axis, and the absorption axis of the second polarizing plate is preferably parallel to the Y axis or X axis. Not what you want.

The liquid crystal display device is illuminated by a well-known planar illumination device (backlight). The planar illumination device may be a direct-type planar light source device or an edge light type (also referred to as a side light type) planar light source device. Here, the direct-type planar light source device includes, for example, a light source disposed in a housing, a reflecting member that is disposed in a portion of the housing located below the light source, and reflects upward light emitted from the light source. The diffusing plate is attached to a housing opening located above the light source and allows the outgoing light from the light source and the reflected light from the reflecting member to pass through while diffusing. On the other hand, the edge light type planar light source device includes, for example, a light guide plate and a light source disposed on a side surface of the light guide plate. A reflective member is disposed below the light guide plate, and a diffusion sheet and a prism sheet are disposed above the light guide plate. The light source is composed of, for example, a cold cathode fluorescent lamp and emits white light. Alternatively, for example, the light emitting element is an LED or a semiconductor laser element. By controlling the passage of light from the planar illumination device (backlight) by the liquid crystal display device, an image can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In the liquid crystal display device according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure, the first alignment film, that is, at least one of the pair of alignment films has a crosslinkable functional group as the first side chain. A pretilt imparted to a liquid crystal molecule, including a compound (after alignment treatment / compound) obtained by crosslinking, polymerization, or deformation of a polymer compound having a group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group (before alignment treatment / compound) However, it will be in the state of being held and fixed by the compound after the alignment treatment. Therefore, when an electric field is applied between the pixel electrode and the counter electrode, the liquid crystal molecules respond in a predetermined direction with respect to the substrate surface in the major axis direction, and good display characteristics are ensured. In addition, since the pretilt applied to the liquid crystal molecules is in a state of being held and fixed by the compound after the alignment treatment, it corresponds to the electric field between the electrodes as compared with the case where the pretilt is not applied to the liquid crystal molecules. The response speed (rise speed of image display) is increased, and good display characteristics are easily maintained as compared with the case where a pretilt is applied without using a crosslinked, polymerized or deformed compound.

In the method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure, the first side chain includes a polymer compound (a compound before alignment treatment / compound) having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. After forming the first alignment film, the liquid crystal layer is sealed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Further, in the method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the second aspect of the present disclosure, the first alignment film including a polymer compound (pre-alignment treatment / compound) having a photosensitive functional group as the first side chain. After forming, the liquid crystal layer is sealed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Here, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer are arranged in a predetermined direction (specifically, a vertical direction or an oblique direction inclined from the vertical direction) with respect to the first alignment film surface as a whole by the first alignment film. It will be in the state which arranged (however, the orientation direction is not necessarily uniform). Next, the polymer compound is crosslinked or polymerized by reacting the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group while applying an electric field. Alternatively, the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) is deformed while applying an electric field. Here, the second side chain is affected by the electric field and tries to line up in a predetermined orientation direction. Moreover, the second side chains tend to line up in an oblique direction slightly inclined from the vertical direction with respect to the surface of the first alignment film. Under the influence of the first alignment film, the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer are aligned in a predetermined direction (an oblique direction slightly inclined from the vertical direction) as a whole with respect to the surface of the first alignment film. As described above, the pretilt imparted to the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the cross-linked or polymerized or deformed compound (after the alignment treatment / compound) is held / fixed, or the pretilt is held / fixed. It becomes possible. For this reason, the response speed (rise speed of image display) is improved as compared with the case where no pretilt is given to the liquid crystal molecules. Moreover, by cross-linking, polymerizing or deforming the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) in a state where the liquid crystal molecules are arranged, linearly polarized light or oblique direction is applied to the alignment film before sealing the liquid crystal layer. A pretilt can be imparted to the liquid crystal molecules without irradiation with light or without using a large-scale apparatus.

In the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure, the pretilt imparted to the liquid crystal molecules is maintained by irradiating the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) with energy rays. -It can be fixed. That is, by cross-linking, polymerizing or deforming the first side chain of the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) in a state where the liquid crystal molecules are aligned, the liquid crystal molecules are not given a pretilt, Response speed (rise speed of image display) is improved. Moreover, pre-tilt is given to the liquid crystal molecules without irradiating the alignment film with linearly polarized light or oblique light before sealing the liquid crystal layer, or without using a large-scale device. can do.

Moreover, in the present disclosure, the second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure). Or a structure having a dipole moment within an angle range of more than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from the major axis direction and inducing vertical orientation (the second of the present disclosure) The liquid crystal display device according to the aspect) or the second side chain has the structural formula (11) (the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure). That is, a compound (after alignment treatment / compound) obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) has a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group as the first side chain. A photosensitive functional group, having the above-mentioned properties as a second side chain, the first side chain being bonded to the main chain, cross-linked or polymerized or deformed, and a terminal structure bonded to the site The liquid crystal molecules are easy to follow along the second side chain or are sandwiched between the second side chains. Therefore, when an electric field is applied, the second side chain is aligned in a direction that depends on the direction of the electric field (for example, a direction slightly inclined from the direction of the electric field). As a result, the pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules by the second side chain. Can be promoted. As a result, in the manufacturing process of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to reduce the value of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer in order to impart pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules constituting the liquid crystal layer. In addition, when the liquid crystal display device is manufactured, the voltage applied when applying a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules can be further reduced. In addition, since the distortion of the liquid crystal molecules at the pretilt-provided alignment interface can be relaxed, the pretilt value can be stabilized and the response speed can be further improved. Note that the effects described in the present specification are merely examples and are not limited, and may have additional effects.

FIG. 1 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a modified example of the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure. 3A and 3B are schematic views of the first electrode and the first slit portion when one pixel is viewed from above. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the pretilt of liquid crystal molecules. FIG. 5 is a flowchart for explaining a method of manufacturing the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the state of the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) in the alignment film for explaining the method of manufacturing the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a substrate and the like for explaining a method of manufacturing the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a substrate and the like for explaining the process following FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a substrate and the like for explaining the process following FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the state of the polymer compound (after alignment treatment / compound) in the alignment film. FIG. 11 is a circuit configuration diagram of the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic cross-sectional view for explaining order parameters. FIG. 13 is a conceptual diagram showing a state in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt in the vicinity of the first alignment film having a side chain in which the first side chain and the second side chain represented by the structural formula (13) are combined. It is. FIG. 14 is a conceptual diagram illustrating the relationship between a deformed polymer compound and liquid crystal molecules. FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing the direction of the dipole moment of the second side chain and the direction of the dipole moment of the liquid crystal molecules. FIG. 16 is a schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1. FIG. 17 is a schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-2. FIG. 18 is a schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-3. FIG. 19 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel that constitutes the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 2A-1 to 2A-3. 20A and 20B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 19 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, and FIG. 20D is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like taken along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 19 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-2. 21A and 21B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 19 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-3. FIG. 22 is a schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4. 23A and 23B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 19 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4. FIG. 24 is a schematic partial end view of a modification of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4. FIG. 25 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1. 26A, 26B, and 26C are schematic partial views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA, BB, and CC in FIG. 25 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1. FIG. 26D is a schematic partial cross-sectional view in which a part of FIG. 26C is enlarged. 27A and 27B are conceptual diagrams showing the behavior of liquid crystal molecules in the conventional liquid crystal display device and the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, respectively. FIG. 28 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-2. FIG. 29 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-3. 30A and 30B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 28 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-2, and FIG. FIG. 30D is a schematic partial end view of the first electrode and the like along the arrow CC in FIG. 29 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-3, and FIG. 30D is a schematic enlarged view of a part of FIG. 30C. FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic plan view of a modified example of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-3. FIG. 32 is a schematic perspective view of another modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-3. FIG. 33 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4. FIG. 34 is a schematic perspective view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4 shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-5. 36A and 36B are schematic partial end views of the first electrode and the like along the arrows AA and BB in FIG. 33 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4, and FIG. FIG. 36D is a schematic partial end view enlarging a part of FIG. 36B. FIG. 36D shows a part of the first electrode along the arrow DD in FIG. 35 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-5. It is the expanded typical partial end view. FIG. 37 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-6. FIG. 38 is a schematic perspective view of a modified example of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-6. FIG. 39 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7. FIG. 40 is a schematic plan view of a modified example of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7. FIG. 41 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along the arrow AA in FIG. 39 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7. FIG. 42 is a schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8. FIG. 43 is a schematic partial end view of a modification of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8. FIG. 44 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. FIG. 45 is a schematic plan view of a modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. FIG. 46 is a schematic plan view of another modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. FIG. 47 is a schematic plan view of still another modified example of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. 48A and 48B are schematic partial end views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 44 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. FIG. 48D is a schematic partial end view of the first electrode and the like taken along arrows CC and DD in FIG. 46 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. FIG. 49 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1. FIG. 50 is a schematic plan view in which a part of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1 is enlarged. 51A and 51B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 49 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1, and FIG. FIG. 51B is a schematic partial cross-sectional view in which a part of FIG. 51B is enlarged. 52A and 52B are schematic diagrams for explaining the behavior of liquid crystal molecules in the branch convex portions of Example 2C-1 and the liquid crystal display device in which the branch convex portions are not tapered, respectively. FIG. 53 is a schematic partial end view of a modification of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-2. 54A and 54B are schematic partial end views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 53 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-2. FIG. FIG. 55 is a schematic partial end view in which a part of FIG. 54B is enlarged. FIG. 55 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3. FIG. 56 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-4. FIG. 57 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-5. FIG. 58 is a schematic plan view of a modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-5. FIG. 59 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6. FIG. 60 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-7. FIG. 61 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-8. FIG. 62 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1. 63A is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along the arrow AA in FIG. 62 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1, and FIG. 63B is an enlarged view of a part of FIG. 63B. FIG. 64A and 64B are schematic plan views of a part of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-2. 65A and 65B are schematic plan views of a part of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-2. FIG. 66 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-3. FIG. 67 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-4. 68A, 68B and 68C are diagrams schematically showing the arrangement state of the convex portion, the concave portion, the central region, etc. in the pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5, respectively, provided on the first electrode. It is the figure which shows typically the arrangement | positioning state of the obtained slit part, and the figure which piled up the uneven | corrugated | grooved part and the slit part. FIGS. 69A, 69B, and 69C are diagrams each schematically showing an arrangement state of a convex portion, a concave portion, a central region, and the like in a modification example of the pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5. It is the figure which shows typically the arrangement | positioning state of the slit part provided in the electrode, and the figure which piled up the uneven | corrugated | grooved part and the slit part. FIG. 70A, FIG. 70B, and FIG. 70C are diagrams each schematically showing an arrangement state of a convex portion, a concave portion, a central region, and the like in another modification example of the pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5 It is the figure which shows typically the arrangement | positioning state of the slit part provided in the 1st electrode, and the figure which piled up the uneven | corrugated | grooved part and the slit part. 71A, 71B, and 71C are diagrams each schematically showing an arrangement state of a convex portion, a concave portion, a central region, and the like in still another modified example of the pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an arrangement state of slit portions provided in a first electrode, and a diagram in which an uneven portion and a slit portion are superimposed. 72A is a schematic end view taken along arrow AA in FIG. 68C, FIG. 72B is a schematic end view taken along arrow BB in FIG. 69C, and FIG. 72C is shown in FIG. FIG. 72D is a schematic end view taken along arrow CC in FIG. 71, and FIG. 72D is a schematic end view taken along arrow DD in FIG. 71C. FIGS. 73A and 73B are diagrams schematically showing arrangement states of convex portions, concave portions, slit portions, and the like in still another modification example of the pixels constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5, and FIG. 73B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along arrow BB in FIG. 73A. FIGS. 74A and 74B are diagrams schematically showing arrangement states of convex portions, concave portions, slit portions, and the like in still another modification example of the pixels constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5, and FIG. 74B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along arrow BB in FIG. 74A. FIG. 75 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-6. FIG. 76A is a schematic plan view of a part of the first electrode in the central region of one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-6. FIGS. 76B and 76C show the liquid crystal of Example 2D-6. It is a typical partial cross section figure of a part of 1st electrode in the center area | region of 1 pixel which comprises a display apparatus. 77A and 77B are schematic plan views of a part of the first electrode in the central region of one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-6. FIG. 78 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-7. FIG. 79 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. 80A and 80B are schematic plan views in which a part of the first electrode surrounded by a circular region in the schematic plan view of the first electrode in FIG. 79 is enlarged. FIG. 81 is an enlarged schematic plan view of a part of the first electrode surrounded by a circular region in the schematic plan view of the first electrode in FIG. 79. FIG. 82 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting a modification (see Example 2D-4) of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. FIG. 83 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting a modification (see Example 2D-5) of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. FIG. 84 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting a modification (see Example 2D-5) of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. FIG. 85 is a schematic plan view of a first electrode for one pixel constituting a modification (see Example 2D-5) of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. FIG. 86 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting another modification of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8 (see Example 2D-6). FIG. 87 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting still another modified example (see Example 2D-7) of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. FIG. 88 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9. 89A, 89B, and 89C are schematic partial views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA, BB, and CC in FIG. 88 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9. FIG. 89D is a schematic partial cross-sectional view enlarging a part of FIG. 88C. FIG. 90 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-10. FIG. 91 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-11. 92A and 92B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 90 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-10. FIG. FIG. 92D is a schematic partial end view of the first electrode and the like along the arrow CC in FIG. 91 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-11. FIG. 92D is a schematic enlarged view of a part of FIG. 92C. FIG. FIG. 93 is a schematic plan view of a modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-11. FIG. 94 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-12. 95A and 95B are conceptual diagrams showing the behavior of liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8. 96A and 96B are schematic partial end views of the first substrate before TFTs and the like are formed and uneven portions are formed on the first electrode. FIG. 97 is a schematic plan view of a part of the convex portion for explaining the formation pitch of the convex portion, the width of the convex portion, the width of the tip portion of the convex portion, and the like. FIG. 98 is a schematic plan view of a part of the convex portion for explaining the formation pitch of the convex portion, the width of the convex portion, the width of the tip portion of the convex portion, and the like.

Hereinafter, the present disclosure will be described based on the embodiments and examples of the invention with reference to the drawings. However, the present disclosure is not limited to the embodiments and examples of the invention. Various numerical values and materials in the examples are illustrative. The description will be given in the following order.
1. 1. Description of common configuration and structure in the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure 2. Description of a liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure and a manufacturing method thereof according to an embodiment of the invention 3. Description of liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure and manufacturing method thereof based on Embodiment 1. Explanation of various modifications of the first electrode based on Example 2, and others

[Description on Common Configuration and Structure of Liquid Crystal Display Device (Liquid Crystal Display Element) of Present Disclosure]
A schematic partial cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal display device (or liquid crystal display element) of the present disclosure is shown in FIG. This liquid crystal display device has a plurality of pixels 10 (10A, 10B, 10C...). In this liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element), liquid crystal is interposed between alignment layers 21 and 51 between a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) substrate 20 and a CF (Color Filter layer) substrate 50. A liquid crystal layer 70 including molecules 71 is provided. This liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) is a so-called transmission type, and the display mode is a vertical alignment (VA) mode. FIG. 1 shows a non-driving state in which no driving voltage is applied. Note that the pixel 10 is actually composed of subpixels such as a subpixel that displays a red image, a subpixel that displays a green image, and a subpixel that displays a blue image.

Here, the TFT substrate 20 corresponds to the first substrate, and the CF substrate 50 corresponds to the second substrate. The pixel electrode 40 and the alignment film 21 provided on the first substrate (TFT substrate) 20 correspond to the first electrode and the first alignment film, and the counter electrode 60 provided on the second substrate (CF substrate) 50. The alignment film 51 corresponds to the second electrode and the second alignment film.

That is, the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure is
A first alignment film 21 and a second alignment film 51 provided on the opposing surface side of the pair of

substrates

20 and 50, and
A liquid crystal layer 70 including liquid crystal molecules 71 disposed between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
The liquid crystal display element which has is provided.

In the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure, at least the first alignment film (specifically, the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51) has a first side chain and a second side chain. The polymer compound includes a crosslinked or polymerized compound, the first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group, and the liquid crystal molecules 71 are given a pretilt by the first alignment film 21. Furthermore, a pretilt is also given by the second alignment film 51.

Specifically, the first alignment film 21 includes a compound (after alignment treatment / compound) obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. The second alignment film 51 also includes a compound (post-alignment treatment / compound) obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. Here, the polymer compound that constitutes the first alignment film 21 and the polymer compound that constitutes the second alignment film 51 are preferably the same polymer compound, and the alignment treatment that constitutes the first alignment film 21. The post-alignment treatment / compound constituting the post-compound and the second alignment film 51 is the same post-alignment treatment / compound. As described above, the liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by the first alignment film 21 (after the alignment treatment / by the compound) (first pretilt angle θ ₁ ), and the liquid crystal molecules are transferred by the second alignment film 51. A pretilt is imparted (after the alignment treatment / by the compound) (second pretilt angle θ ₂ ).

Alternatively, in the liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure, at least the first alignment film (specifically, the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51) includes the first side chain and the second side chain. The first side chain has a photosensitive functional group, the liquid crystal molecule 71 is given a pretilt by the first alignment film 21, and the first side chain has a photosensitive functional group. A pretilt is also given by the bi-alignment film 51.

More specifically, this liquid crystal display device
A first substrate (TFT substrate) 20 and a second substrate (CF substrate) 50;
A first electrode (pixel electrode) 40 formed on the facing surface of the first substrate 20 facing the second substrate 50;
A first alignment regulating portion 44 provided on the first electrode (pixel electrode) 40;
A first alignment film 21 covering the opposing surfaces of the first electrode (pixel electrode) 40, the first alignment regulating portion 44, and the first substrate (TFT substrate) 20,
A second electrode (counter electrode) 60 formed on the facing surface of a second substrate (CF substrate) 50 facing the first substrate (TFT substrate) 20;
A second alignment film 51 covering the opposing surfaces of the second electrode (counter electrode) 60 and the second substrate (CF substrate) 50, and
A liquid crystal layer 70 provided between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 and including liquid crystal molecules 71;
A plurality of pixels 10 having the above are arranged.

The TFT substrate 20 made of a glass substrate has a plurality of pixel electrodes 40 arranged in a matrix, for example, on the surface facing the CF substrate 50 made of a glass substrate. Furthermore, a TFT switching element having a gate, a source, a drain and the like for driving the plurality of pixel electrodes 40, and a gate line and a source line (not shown) connected to these TFT switching elements are provided. The pixel electrode 40 is provided for each pixel electrically separated by the pixel separation unit, and is made of a transparent material such as ITO (indium tin oxide). The pixel electrode 40 is provided with a first slit portion 44 (a portion where no electrode is formed) having, for example, a stripe shape or a V-shaped pattern in each pixel. 3A or 3B shows the layout of the first electrode (pixel electrode) 40 and the first slit portion 44 when one pixel (sub-pixel) is viewed from above. . Thereby, when a driving voltage is applied, an oblique electric field is applied to the major axis direction of the liquid crystal molecules 71, and regions having different alignment directions are formed in the pixels (alignment division). improves. That is, the first slit portion 44 is a first alignment restricting portion for restricting the alignment of the entire liquid crystal molecules 71 in the liquid crystal layer 70 in order to ensure good display characteristics. The portion 44 regulates the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules 71 when a driving voltage is applied. As described above, basically, the azimuth angle of the liquid crystal molecules when pretilt is applied is defined by the strength and direction of the electric field and the molecular structure of the alignment film material, and the direction of the electric field is determined by the alignment regulating unit. The

The CF substrate 50 is composed of, for example, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) stripe filter layers on the surface facing the TFT substrate 20 over almost the entire effective display area. A color filter layer (not shown) and a counter electrode 60 are disposed. As with the pixel electrode 40, the counter electrode 60 is made of a transparent material such as ITO. The counter electrode 60 is a so-called solid electrode that is not patterned.

The first alignment film 21 is provided on the surface of the TFT substrate 20 on the liquid crystal layer side so as to cover the pixel electrode 40 and the first slit portion 44. The second alignment film 51 is provided on the surface of the CF substrate 50 on the liquid crystal layer side so as to cover the counter electrode 60. The first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 regulate the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 71. Here, the liquid crystal molecules 71 positioned away from the substrate are aligned in the direction perpendicular to the substrate surface, and The liquid crystal molecules 71 (71A, 71B) in the vicinity of the substrate have a function of imparting a pretilt. In the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) shown in FIG. 1, no slit portion is provided on the CF substrate 50 side.

FIG. 11 shows a circuit configuration of the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display element having a plurality of pixels 10 provided in a display region 80. In this liquid crystal display device, power is supplied to the periphery of the display area 80 to the source driver 81 and the gate driver 82, the timing controller 83 that controls the source driver 81 and the gate driver 82, and the source driver 81 and the gate driver 82. A power supply circuit 84 is provided.

The display area 80 is an area in which an image is displayed, and is an area configured to display an image by arranging a plurality of pixels 10 in a matrix. In addition, in FIG. 11, the display area 80 including the plurality of pixels 10 is shown, and areas corresponding to the four pixels 10 are separately enlarged.

In the display region 80, a plurality of source lines 91 are arranged in the row direction, and a plurality of gate lines 92 are arranged in the column direction. The pixel 10 is located at a position where the source lines 91 and the gate lines 92 intersect each other. Each is arranged. Each pixel 10 includes a transistor (TFT) 93 and a capacitor 94 together with the pixel electrode 40 and the liquid crystal layer 70. In each transistor 93, the source electrode is connected to the source line 91, the gate electrode is connected to the gate line 92, and the drain electrode is connected to the capacitor 94 and the pixel electrode 40. Each source line 91 is connected to a source driver 81, and an image signal is supplied from the source driver 81. Each gate line 92 is connected to a gate driver 82, and scanning signals are sequentially supplied from the gate driver 82.

The source driver 81 and the gate driver 82 select a specific pixel 10 from the plurality of pixels 10.

The timing controller 83 outputs, for example, an image signal (for example, RGB video signals corresponding to red, green, and blue) and a source driver control signal for controlling the operation of the source driver 81 to the source driver 81. To do. Further, the timing controller 83 outputs, for example, a gate driver control signal for controlling the operation of the gate driver 82 to the gate driver 82. Examples of the source driver control signal include a horizontal synchronization signal, a start pulse signal, and a source driver clock signal. Examples of the gate driver control signal include a vertical synchronization signal and a gate driver clock signal.

In this liquid crystal display device, an image is displayed by applying a driving voltage between the first electrode (pixel electrode) 40 and the second electrode (counter electrode) 60 in the following manner. Specifically, the source driver 81 supplies an individual image signal to a predetermined source line 91 based on the image signal input from the timing controller 83 in response to the input of the source driver control signal from the timing controller 83. At the same time, the gate driver 82 sequentially supplies the scanning signal to the gate line 92 at a predetermined timing in response to the input of the gate driver control signal from the timing controller 83. As a result, the pixel 10 located at the intersection of the source line 91 supplied with the image signal and the gate line 92 supplied with the scanning signal is selected, and a drive voltage is applied to the pixel 10.

Hereinafter, the present disclosure will be described based on embodiments of the invention (abbreviated as “embodiments”) and examples.

[Embodiment 1]
Embodiment 1 is a VA mode liquid crystal display device (or liquid crystal display element) according to the present disclosure, and a method for manufacturing the liquid crystal display device (or liquid crystal display element) according to the first and third aspects of the present disclosure. About. In Embodiment 1, the first alignment film and the second alignment film (alignment films 21 and 51) are either one kind of polymer compound (after alignment treatment / compound) having a first side chain having a crosslinked structure, or It is comprised including 2 or more types. The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt. Here, after the alignment treatment, the alignment film 21 includes one or more of polymer compounds (pre-alignment treatment / compound) having a main chain and first and second side chains. , 51 is formed, then a liquid crystal layer 70 is provided, and then the polymer compound is crosslinked or polymerized, or moreover, the polymer compound is irradiated with energy rays, more specifically, an electric field or a magnetic field. Is generated by reacting a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group contained in the first side chain. After the alignment treatment, the compound has liquid crystal molecules in a predetermined direction (specifically, an oblique direction slightly inclined from the vertical direction) with respect to a pair of substrates (specifically, the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50). It includes a structure (specifically, a second side chain) that is arranged in the form. In this way, the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) is crosslinked or polymerized, or alternatively, the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) is irradiated with energy rays, so that the compound is aligned after the alignment treatment. By being included in the

films

21 and 51, a pretilt can be imparted to the liquid crystal molecules 71 in the vicinity of the

alignment films

21 and 51, so that the response speed (rise speed of image display and fall speed of image display) is increased, Display characteristics are improved.

Here, the second side chain is
It has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure), or alternatively
The second side chain has a range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction (preferably a range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 60 degrees from its major axis direction, more preferably A dipole moment within an angle range of greater than 0 degrees and less than or equal to 40 degrees from the major axis direction, more preferably an angle range of greater than 0 degrees and less than 30 degrees from the major axis direction; and , Having a structure for inducing vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the second aspect of the present disclosure), or
The second side chain has the above structural formula (11), more specifically, the above structural formula (12) (the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure). The same applies to the second embodiment to be described later.

More specifically, the second side chain represented by the structural formula (12) described above includes, for example, the following formula (G-A01) to formula (GA20), formula (G-B01) to formula ( GB20), formula (G-C01) to formula (G-C16), formula (G-D01) to formula (GD16), formula (GE01) to formula (GE02), formula (G -F01) to Formula (G-F12), Formula (G-H01) to Formula (G-H12), and Formula (G-J01) to Formula (G-J14). Here, “a1” and “a2” are each independently an integer of 0 or more and 17 or less. However, in the formula (GE01), “a1” is an integer of 2 or more and 17 or less. The structures shown in these formulas have a dipole moment within an angle range of greater than 0 degrees and less than or equal to 60 degrees from the major axis direction of the second side chain. Further, the structures shown in the formulas (G-J05) and (G-J06) have a dipole moment of approximately 60 degrees from the major axis direction. Furthermore, the structures shown in the formulas (G-J01) and (G-J03) have a dipole moment of approximately 40 degrees from the major axis direction. Furthermore, the structures shown in the formulas (GA01), (GA11), (GB01), and (GB11) have a dipole moment of approximately 30 degrees from the long axis direction. In the structures shown in these formulas, “A ₀ ” of the second side chain can be bonded to the main chain via, for example, m-phenylenediamine.

Here, in Formula (G-J01), Formula (G-J02), Formula (G-J03), and Formula (G-J04), “A ₂ ” in Formula (11) is a fluorine atom. In formula (GJ07), “A ₃ ” in formula (11) is a chlorine atom. In formula (GJ08), “A ₀ ” in formula (12) is replaced with “—COO”. However, it goes without saying that these modifications can be applied to other equations.

However, n1 and n2 are integers of 2 or more and 17 or less.

The liquid crystal layer 70 includes liquid crystal molecules 71 having negative dielectric anisotropy. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 71 include molecules having a dipole moment in the minor axis direction. As shown in FIG. 15, the direction of the dipole moment of the second side chain has a dipole moment in a direction different from this liquid crystal molecule, that is, along the electric field from the direction perpendicular to the electric field direction. It has a dipole moment in the direction, ie in the range of 60 degrees, preferably in the range of 40 degrees, more preferably in the range of 30 degrees. Therefore, the second side chains are easily arranged in a direction slightly inclined from the electric field direction when the electric field is applied.

It is preferable that the compound before alignment treatment includes a structure having high heat resistance as a main chain. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element), even after being exposed to a high temperature environment, the compound after alignment treatment in the

alignment films

21 and 51 maintains the alignment regulating ability with respect to the liquid crystal molecules 71. Display characteristics such as contrast are maintained well, and reliability is ensured. Here, the main chain preferably contains an imide bond in the repeating unit. Examples of the pre-alignment treatment compound containing an imide bond in the main chain include a polymer compound containing a polyimide structure represented by the formula (3). The polymer compound containing the polyimide structure represented by the formula (3) may be composed of one of the polyimide structures represented by the formula (3), or a plurality of kinds may be randomly connected and contained. In addition to the structure shown in Formula (3), other structures may be included.

Here, R1 is a tetravalent organic group, R2 is a divalent organic group, and n1 is an integer of 1 or more.

R1 and R2 in the formula (3) are arbitrary as long as they are tetravalent or divalent groups containing carbon, but either one of R1 and R2 can be used as the first side chain. It preferably contains a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. This is because sufficient alignment regulation ability is easily obtained after the alignment treatment and in the compound.

In addition, in the compound before the alignment treatment, a plurality of side chains are bonded to the main chain, and at least one of the plurality of side chains is a first side chain including a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. Preferably there is. That is, the compound before alignment treatment / compound may contain a side chain that does not exhibit crosslinkability in addition to the first side chain that has crosslinkability. 1 type may be sufficient as the 1st side chain containing a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group, and multiple types may be sufficient as it. The crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group may be any functional group that can be crosslinked or polymerized after the liquid crystal layer 70 is formed, and may be a group that forms a crosslinked structure by a photoreaction. A group that forms a crosslinked structure by reaction may be used, but among them, a photoreactive crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group (photosensitive photosensitive group) that forms a crosslinked structure by photoreaction is preferable. This is because the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 71 is easily regulated in a predetermined direction, the response characteristics are improved, and the manufacture of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) having good display characteristics is facilitated.

Examples of photoreactive crosslinkable functional groups (photosensitive photosensitive groups such as photodimerized photosensitive groups) include chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol, and chitosan. The group containing any one type of these is mentioned. Among these, examples of the group containing a chalcone, cinnamate, or cinnamoyl structure include a group represented by the formula (41). When the pre-alignment treatment compound having the first side chain containing the group represented by the formula (41) is crosslinked, for example, a structure represented by the formula (42) is formed. That is, the post-alignment treatment compound generated from the polymer compound containing the group represented by the formula (41) includes a structure represented by the formula (42) having a cyclobutane skeleton. In addition, for example, a photoreactive crosslinkable functional group such as maleimide may exhibit not only a photodimerization reaction but also a polymerization reaction. Accordingly, the expression is a compound in which a polymer compound having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group is crosslinked or polymerized.

Here, R3 is a divalent group containing an aromatic ring, R4 is a monovalent group containing one or two or more ring structures, and R5 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a derivative thereof.

R3 in the formula (41) is arbitrary as long as it is a divalent group including an aromatic ring such as a benzene ring, and includes a carbonyl group, an ether bond, an ester bond or a hydrocarbon group in addition to the aromatic ring. May be. R4 in formula (41) is arbitrary as long as it is a monovalent group containing one or two or more ring structures. In addition to the ring structure, R4 is a carbonyl group, an ether bond, an ester bond, a hydrocarbon group, or a halogen atom. It may contain atoms and the like. The ring structure of R4 is arbitrary as long as it contains carbon as an element constituting the skeleton, and as the ring structure, for example, an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring, or a combination or condensed thereof Examples thereof include a ring structure. R5 in formula (41) is arbitrary as long as it is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a derivative thereof. Here, the “derivative” refers to a group in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group are substituted with a substituent such as a halogen atom. Moreover, carbon number of the alkyl group introduce | transduced as R5 is arbitrary. R5 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. This is because good crosslinking reactivity can be obtained.

R3 in the formula (42) may be the same or different from each other. The same applies to R4 and R5 in the formula (41). Examples of R3, R4, and R5 in Formula (42) include the same as R3, R4, and R5 in Formula (41) described above.

Examples of the group represented by formula (41) include groups represented by formula (41-1) to formula (41-33). However, the group is not limited to the groups represented by the formulas (41-1) to (41-33) as long as the group has the structure represented by the formula (41).

Prior to the alignment treatment, the compound includes a structure for aligning the liquid crystal molecules 71 in a direction perpendicular to the substrate surface, that is, a structure for inducing vertical alignment (hereinafter referred to as “vertical alignment inducing structure”). Yes. Thus, even if the

alignment films

21 and 51 do not contain a compound having a vertical alignment inducing structure part (so-called normal vertical alignment agent) separately from the compound after alignment treatment, the alignment regulation of the entire liquid crystal molecules 71 is restricted. It becomes possible. In addition, the

alignment films

21 and 51 that can more uniformly exhibit the alignment regulating function with respect to the liquid crystal layer 70 are more easily formed than the case where the compound having the vertical alignment inducing structure portion is included separately. The vertical alignment-inducing structure is preferably contained in the second side chain in the pre-alignment treatment compound, but may be contained in the main chain or in the second side chain and main chain. It may be included. In addition, when the compound before alignment treatment includes the polyimide structure represented by the above formula (3), a structure (repeating unit) including a vertical alignment inducing structure portion as R2, and a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group as R2. It is preferable that it contains two types of structures, including a structure containing repeating units (repeating units). It is because it is easily available. In addition, if the vertical alignment inducing structure portion is included in the compound before the alignment treatment, it is also included in the compound after the alignment treatment.

Moreover, if expressed in accordance with the first configuration of the present disclosure, the polymer compound before crosslinking (before the alignment treatment / compound) has, for example, a group represented by the formula (1) as the first side chain. Composed of compounds. Since the group represented by the formula (1) can move along the liquid crystal molecules 71, the group represented by the formula (1) is aligned in the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules 71 before the alignment treatment and when the compound is crosslinked. Are fixed together with a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. The group represented by the fixed formula (1) makes it easier to regulate the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 71 in a predetermined direction, and therefore, it is possible to more easily manufacture a liquid crystal display element having good display characteristics. it can.

-R ₁ '-R ₂ ' -R ₃ '(1)
Here, R ₁ ′ is a linear or branched divalent organic group having 1 or more carbon atoms, which may contain an ether group or an ester group. R ₁ ′ is at least one selected from the group consisting of ethers, esters, ether esters, acetals, ketals, hemiacetals and hemiketals. It is bonded to the main chain of the polymer compound or the cross-linked compound (before or after alignment treatment or compound after alignment treatment). R ₂ ′ is a divalent organic group containing a plurality of ring structures, and one of the atoms constituting the ring structure is bonded to R ₁ ′. R ₃ ′ is a monovalent group having a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or a carbonate group, or a derivative thereof.

R ₁ ′ in formula (1) fixes R ₂ ′ and R ₃ ′ to the main chain, and gives a large pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules if long R ₁ ′ is selected, and is short. If R ₁ ′ is selected, it is a site for functioning as a spacer part for making the pretilt angle easily constant. Examples of R ₁ ′ include an alkylene group. This alkylene group may have an ether bond between carbon atoms in the middle, and the number of positions having the ether bond may be one or two or more. R ₁ ′ may have a carbonyl group or a carbonate group. The carbon number of R ₁ ′ is more preferably 6 or more. This is because the group represented by the formula (1) interacts with the liquid crystal molecules 71 and therefore easily follows the liquid crystal molecules 71. The number of carbon atoms is preferably determined so that the length of R ₁ ′ is approximately equal to the length of the terminal chain of the liquid crystal molecule 71.

R ₂ ′ in the formula (1) is a portion along a ring structure (core portion) contained in a general nematic liquid crystal molecule. As R ₂ ′, for example, 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, 1,6-naphthalene group, divalent group having a steroid skeleton or derivatives thereof And the like, and the same group or skeleton as the ring structure contained in the liquid crystal molecule. Here, the “derivative” is a group in which one or two or more substituents are introduced into the series of groups described above.

R ₃ ′ in the formula (1) is a portion along the terminal chain of the liquid crystal molecule, and examples of R ₃ ′ include an alkyl group or a halogenated alkyl group. However, in the halogenated alkyl group, it suffices that at least one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group is substituted with a halogen atom, and the type of the halogen atom is arbitrary. The alkyl group or the halogenated alkyl group may have an ether bond between carbon atoms in the middle, and the position having the ether bond may be one or two or more. R ₃ ′ may have a carbonyl group or a carbonate group. The number of carbon atoms in R ₃ ′ is more preferably 6 or more for the same reason as R ₁ ′.

Specifically, examples of the group shown in Formula (1) include monovalent groups represented by Formula (1-1) to Formula (1-12).

Note that the group shown in Formula (1) is not limited to the above group as long as it can move along the liquid crystal molecules 71.

Alternatively, if expressed in accordance with the second configuration of the present disclosure, the polymer compound before crosslinking (the compound before alignment treatment / compound) has a group represented by the formula (2) as the first side chain. Consists of. In addition to the cross-linking site, it has a site along the liquid crystal molecule 71 and a site that defines the tilt angle, so the first side chain site along the liquid crystal molecule 71 can be fixed along the liquid crystal molecule 71. It is. As a result, the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 71 can be easily regulated in a predetermined direction, so that it is possible to more easily manufacture a liquid crystal display element having good display characteristics.

-R ₁₁ '-R ₁₂ ' -R ₁₃ '-R ₁₄ ' (2)
Here, R ₁₁ ′ is an organic group which may contain a linear or branched divalent ether group or ester group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 3 to 12 carbon atoms. Yes, and bonded to the main chain of the polymer compound or the crosslinked compound (before or after the alignment treatment or after the alignment treatment), or R ₁₁ ′ is ether, ester, ether ester, acetal, ketal, It is at least one linking group selected from the group consisting of hemiacetal and hemiketal, and is bonded to the main chain of a polymer compound or a crosslinked compound (before or after alignment treatment / compound). R ₁₂ ′ is, for example, a divalent group containing any one structure of chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol, chitosan, acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, epoxy and oxetane, Or, it is an ethynylene group. R ₁₃ ′ is a divalent organic group containing a plurality of ring structures. R ₁₄ ′ is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a monovalent group having a carbonate group, or a derivative thereof.

R ₁₁ ′ in the formula (2) is a site that defines a tilt angle before the alignment treatment / compound, and preferably has flexibility before the alignment treatment / compound. Examples of R ₁₁ ′ include the groups described for R ₁ ′ in formula (1). In the group shown in the formula (2), R ₁₂ ′ to R ₁₄ ′ are easy to move around R ₁₁ ′, so that R ₁₃ ′ and R ₁₄ ′ are easy to follow the liquid crystal molecules 71. R ₁₁ ′ has more preferably 6 or more and 10 or less carbon atoms.

R ₁₂ ′ in the formula (2) is a site having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. As described above, this crosslinkable functional group or polymerizable functional group may be a group that forms a crosslinked structure by a photoreaction or a group that forms a crosslinked structure by a thermal reaction. Specifically, R ₁₂ ′ includes, for example, any one of chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol, chitosan, acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, epoxy, and oxetane. A divalent group or an ethynylene group can be exemplified.

R ₁₃ ′ in the formula (2) is a site that can follow the core site of the liquid crystal molecule 71, and examples of the R ₁₃ ′ include the group described for R ₂ ′ in the formula (1). Can be mentioned.

R ₁₄ ′ in the formula (2) is a site along the terminal chain of the liquid crystal molecule 71, and examples of R ₁₄ ′ include the group described for R ₃ ′ in the formula (1).

Specifically, examples of the group represented by the formula (2) include monovalent groups represented by the formulas (2-1) to (2-11).

Here, n is an integer of 3 or more and 20 or less.

The group shown in the formula (2) is not limited to the above group as long as it has the above-described four sites (R ₁₁ ′ to R ₁₄ ′).

In addition, if expressed in accordance with the third configuration of the present disclosure, the compound (after alignment treatment / compound) obtained by crosslinking the polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) has the first side chain and It is composed of a second side chain and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the substrate. The first side chain is bonded to the main chain and crosslinked. The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt along the second side chain or sandwiched between the second side chains. Alternatively, if expressed in accordance with the third configuration of the present disclosure (see Embodiment 2 to be described later), a compound (after alignment treatment) obtained by deforming a polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) The compound) is composed of a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the substrate, and the first side chain Is composed of a deformed portion that is bonded to the main chain and deformed, and a terminal structure portion that is bonded to the deformed portion, and the liquid crystal molecules are sandwiched between the second side chains or between the second side chains. This gives a pretilt. Alternatively, if expressed in accordance with the third configuration of the present disclosure (see Embodiment 2 described later), the compound obtained by irradiating the polymer compound with energy rays includes the first side chain and It is composed of a second side chain and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the substrate. The first side chain is bonded to the main chain and is crosslinked or deformed. The liquid crystal molecules have a pretilt by being along the second side chain or being sandwiched between the second side chains. Is granted.

Here, in the third configuration of the present disclosure, the cross-linked portion in which the first side chain is cross-linked corresponds to R ₁₂ ′ in Formula (2) (but after cross-linking). The terminal structure portion corresponds to R ₁₃ ′ and R ₁₄ ′ in the formula (2). Here, in the compound after the alignment treatment, for example, the cross-linked parts in the two first side chains extending from the main chain are cross-linked with each other, and the terminal structure part extended from one cross-linked part and the other A part of the liquid crystal molecules is sandwiched between the terminal structure part extending from the bridging part, and the terminal structure part is fixed at a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt.

Alternatively, if expressed in accordance with the fourth configuration of the present disclosure, the compound (after the alignment treatment / compound) obtained by crosslinking the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) has the first side chain. And a second side chain, and a main chain supporting the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the substrate. The first side chain is bonded to the main chain and crosslinked. It is comprised from the bridge | crosslinking part and the terminal structure part which couple | bonds with a bridge | crosslinking part and has a mesogenic group. Here, the 1st side chain can be made into the form which has a photodimerization photosensitive group. Further, the main chain and the cross-linked part are bonded by a covalent bond, and the cross-linked part and the terminal structure part can be bonded by a covalent bond. Alternatively, if expressed in accordance with the fourth configuration of the present disclosure (see Embodiment 2 described later), a compound (after alignment treatment) obtained by deforming a polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) The compound) is composed of a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the substrate, and the first side chain Is composed of a deformed portion that is bonded to the main chain and deformed, and a terminal structure portion that is bonded to the deformed portion and has a mesogenic group. Alternatively, if expressed in accordance with the fourth configuration of the present disclosure (see Embodiment 2 described later), a compound obtained by irradiating a polymer compound (before alignment treatment / compound) with energy rays ( The compound after the alignment treatment is composed of a first side chain and a second side chain, and a main chain that supports the first side chain and the second side chain with respect to the substrate. The side chain is composed of a crosslinked / deformed portion bonded to the main chain and crosslinked or deformed, and a terminal structure portion bonded to the crosslinked / deformed portion and having a mesogenic group.

Here, in the fourth configuration of the present disclosure, as the photodimerized photosensitive group that is a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group (photosensitive functional group), as described above, for example, chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, A group including any one of the structures of coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol, and chitosan can be given. Examples of the polymerizable functional group include a group including any one of acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, epoxy, and oxetane. In addition, the rigid mesogenic group constituting the terminal structure part may be one that exhibits liquid crystallinity as a side chain or one that does not exhibit liquid crystallinity. Specific structures include steroid derivatives, cholesterol derivatives, biphenyl, and triphenyl. And naphthalene. Furthermore, examples of the terminal structure part include R ₁₃ ′ and R ₁₄ ′ in Formula (2).

The

alignment films

21 and 51 may contain other vertical alignment agents in addition to the above-described alignment treatment / compound. Other vertical alignment agents include polyimide having a vertical alignment inducing structure, polysiloxane having a vertical alignment inducing structure, and the like.

The liquid crystal layer 70 includes liquid crystal molecules 71 having negative dielectric anisotropy. The liquid crystal molecules 71 have, for example, a rotationally symmetric shape with a major axis and a minor axis orthogonal to each other as central axes, and negative dielectric anisotropy.

The liquid crystal molecules 71 are liquid crystal molecules held in the second alignment film 51 in the vicinity of the interface between the liquid crystal molecules 71A held in the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 in the vicinity of the interface with the first alignment film 21. They can be classified into molecules 71B and liquid crystal molecules 71C other than these. The liquid crystal molecules 71C are located in an intermediate region in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal layer 70, and the major axis direction (director) of the liquid crystal molecules 71C is substantially perpendicular to the first substrate 20 and the second substrate 50 when the drive voltage is off. It is arranged to be. The liquid crystal molecules 71B are located in the vicinity of the second alignment film 51, and the major axis direction (director) of the liquid crystal molecules 71B is set to the second pretilt angle θ ₂ with respect to the second substrate 50 when the drive voltage is off. Oriented. Further, the liquid crystal molecules 71A are located in the vicinity of the first alignment film 21, and the major axis direction (director) of the liquid crystal molecules 71A is the first pretilt angle θ _{1 with} respect to the first substrate 20 when the drive voltage is off. (> Θ ₂ ) and arranged in an inclined manner.

Here, when the drive voltage is turned on, the directors of the liquid crystal molecules 71 </ b> A are tilted and aligned so as to be parallel to the first substrate 20 and the second substrate 50. Such a behavior is attributed to the property that the dielectric constant in the major axis direction is smaller than that in the minor axis direction in the liquid crystal molecules 71A. Since the

liquid crystal molecules

71B and 71C have similar properties, the

liquid crystal molecules

71B and 71C basically exhibit the same behavior as the liquid crystal molecules 71A according to the on / off state change of the drive voltage. However, in a state in which the driving voltage is off, the liquid crystal molecules 71A are given the first pretilt angle θ ₁ by the first alignment film 21, and the director is inclined from the normal direction of the first substrate 20 and the second substrate 50. It becomes. On the other hand, the liquid crystal molecules 71B are given the second pretilt angle θ ₂ by the second alignment film 51, and the director thereof is, for example, parallel to the normal direction of the second substrate 50, or alternatively, the first substrate 20 In addition, the posture is inclined from the normal direction of the second substrate 50. Here, “held” means that the

alignment films

21 and 51 and the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B are not fixed and the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 71 is regulated. Further, the “pretilt angle θ (θ ₁ , θ ₂ )” means that the direction perpendicular to the surfaces of the first substrate 20 and the second substrate 50 (normal direction) is Z as shown in FIG. The tilt angle of the director D of the liquid crystal molecules 71 (71A, 71B) with respect to the Z direction when the drive voltage is off.

Next, with respect to the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element), a schematic diagram for explaining the state in the

alignment films

21 and 51 shown in FIG. 6 together with the flowchart shown in FIG. The manufacturing method will be described with reference to schematic partial cross-sectional views of the liquid crystal display device and the like shown in FIGS.
One of the pair of substrates 20 and 50 (specifically, the substrate 20) is composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group and a second side chain. After forming the first alignment film 21 and forming the second alignment film 51 on the other of the pair of substrates 20 and 50 (specifically, the substrate 50),
A pair of

substrates

20 and 50 are arranged such that the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 face each other, and a negative dielectric constant anisotropic is provided between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. Sealing the liquid crystal layer 70 including the liquid crystal molecules 71 having the property,
Crosslinking or polymerizing the first side chain in the polymer compound to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71;
A process (manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure). Alternatively,
1st orientation which consists of a high molecular compound which has the 1st side chain which has a photosensitive functional group, and the 2nd side chain in one of a pair of board | substrates 20 and 50 (specifically board | substrate 20). After forming the film 21 and forming the second alignment film 51 on the other of the pair of substrates (specifically, the substrate 50),
A pair of

substrates

20 and 50 are arranged such that the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 face each other, and a negative dielectric constant anisotropic is provided between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. Sealing the liquid crystal layer 70 including the liquid crystal molecules 71 having the property,
Deforming the first side chain of the polymer compound to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71;
Including a process (this is a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to the second aspect of the present disclosure, see Embodiment 2 described later). Alternatively,
One of the pair of substrates 20 and 50 (specifically, the substrate 20) is composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a photosensitive functional group and a second side chain. After forming the first alignment film 21 and forming the second alignment film 51 on the other of the pair of substrates 20 and 50 (specifically, the substrate 50),
A pair of

substrates

20 and 50 are arranged such that the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 face each other, and a negative dielectric constant anisotropic is provided between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. Sealing the liquid crystal layer 70 including the liquid crystal molecules 71 having the property,
The polymer compound is irradiated with energy rays to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71.
Including a process (a method of manufacturing a liquid crystal display device according to a third aspect of the present disclosure). 7, 8, and 9, only one pixel is shown for simplification.

And the second side chain is
It has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure), or alternatively
A range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from the major axis direction (preferably a range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 60 degrees from the major axis direction, more preferably 0 degrees from the major axis direction. In the range of angles greater than 40 degrees and less, more preferably in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 30 degrees from the major axis direction (also in the following) Having a structure for inducing orientation (the liquid crystal display device according to the second aspect of the present disclosure);
The above structural formula (11), more specifically, the above structural formula (12) (the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure).

First, the first alignment film 21 is formed on the surface of the first substrate (TFT substrate) 20, and the second alignment film 51 is formed on the surface of the second substrate (CF substrate) 50 (step S101).

Specifically, first, the TFT substrate 20 is manufactured by providing pixel electrodes 40 having predetermined first slit portions 44 on the surface of the first substrate 20 in, for example, a matrix. Also, the CF substrate 50 is manufactured by providing the counter electrode 60 on the color filter layer of the second substrate 50 on which the color filter layer is formed.

On the other hand, for example, before the alignment treatment / compound or before the alignment treatment / polymer compound precursor as a compound, a solvent, and a vertical alignment agent as necessary, are mixed for the liquid first alignment film and the second alignment film. An alignment film material for the alignment film is prepared.

As a polymer compound precursor as a compound before the alignment treatment, for example, when a polymer compound having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group as a side chain includes the polyimide structure represented by the formula (3), a crosslinkable functional group And a polyamic acid having a group or a polymerizable functional group. The polyamic acid as the polymer compound precursor is synthesized, for example, by reacting a diamine compound and tetracarboxylic dianhydride. At least one of the diamine compound and tetracarboxylic dianhydride used here has a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. Examples of the diamine compound include compounds having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group represented by formulas (A-1) to (A-21), and examples of the tetracarboxylic dianhydride include formula (a -1) to a compound having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group represented by formula (a-10). The compounds represented by the formulas (A-9) to (A-21) are compounds constituting the crosslinked part and the terminal structure part of the crosslinked polymer compound in the third structure of the present disclosure. Alternatively, examples of the compound constituting the crosslinked part and the terminal structure part of the crosslinked polymer compound according to the third configuration of the present disclosure include compounds represented by formulas (F-1) to (F-22). You can also.

Here, X1 to X4 are single bonds or divalent organic groups.

Here, X5 to X7 are single bonds or divalent organic groups.

In addition, when synthesizing a polyamic acid as a polymer compound precursor so that the compound includes a vertical alignment inducing structure before alignment treatment, in addition to the compound having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group, a diamine Compounds having a vertical alignment-inducing structure represented by formulas (B-1) to (B-36) as compounds, and tetracarboxylic dianhydrides represented by formulas (b-1) to (b-3) You may use the compound which has the vertical alignment induction structure part represented.

Here, a4 to a6 are integers of 0 or more and 21 or less.

Here, a4 is an integer of 0 or more and 21 or less.

Here, a4 is an integer of 0 or more and 21 or less.

In addition, when the polyamic acid is synthesized as a polymer compound precursor so that the compound has a group represented by the formula (1) together with the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group before the alignment treatment, the crosslinkability described above is used. In addition to a compound having a functional group or a polymerizable functional group, as a diamine compound, a compound having a group that can conform to the liquid crystal molecules 71 represented by the formulas (C-1) to (C-24) It may be used.

In addition, when synthesizing a polyamic acid as a polymer compound precursor so that the compound has a group represented by the formula (2) before the alignment treatment, in addition to the compound having the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group described above. In addition, as the diamine compound, a compound having a group that can be aligned with the liquid crystal molecules 71 represented by the formulas (D-1) to (D-11) may be used.

Here, n is an integer of 3 or more and 20 or less.

Further, the polymer compound so that the compound before the alignment treatment includes two types of structures: a structure containing a vertical alignment inducing structure as R2 in formula (3) and a structure containing a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group When synthesizing a polyamic acid as a precursor, for example, a diamine compound and a tetracarboxylic dianhydride are selected as follows. That is, at least one of compounds having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group represented by formulas (A-1) to (A-21), and formulas (B-1) to (B-36). ), At least one of the compounds having a vertical alignment inducing structure represented by formulas (b-1) to (b-3), and represented by formulas (E-1) to (E-28) And at least one of tetracarboxylic dianhydrides. In the formula (E-23), R 1 and R 2 are the same or different alkyl group, alkoxy group or halogen atom, and the type of halogen atom is arbitrary.

Here, R1 and R2 are an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom.

In addition, the compound before the alignment treatment is high so that the compound includes two types of structures: a structure containing the group shown in the formula (1) as R2 in the formula (3) and a structure containing a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group When synthesizing a polyamic acid as a molecular compound precursor, for example, a diamine compound and a tetracarboxylic dianhydride are selected as follows. That is, at least one of compounds having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group represented by formulas (A-1) to (A-21), and formulas (C-1) to (C-24). ) And at least one of tetracarboxylic dianhydrides represented by the formulas (E-1) to (E-28) are used.

In addition, the compound before the alignment treatment is high so that the compound includes two types of structures: a structure containing the group shown in the formula (2) as R2 in the formula (3) and a structure containing a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group. When synthesizing a polyamic acid as a molecular compound precursor, for example, a diamine compound and a tetracarboxylic dianhydride are selected as follows. That is, at least one of compounds having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group represented by formulas (A-1) to (A-21), and formulas (D-1) to (D-11). And at least one of tetracarboxylic dianhydrides represented by formulas (E-1) to (E-28) is used.

The content of the pre-alignment treatment compound / or the pre-alignment treatment polymer compound precursor in the alignment film material is preferably 1% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, and preferably 3% by mass or more and 10% by mass. % Or less is more preferable. Moreover, you may mix a photoinitiator etc. with alignment film material as needed.

Then, the prepared alignment film material is applied or printed on the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 so as to cover the pixel electrode 40, the first slit portion 44, and the counter electrode 60, and then heat-treated. The temperature for the heat treatment is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 150 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower. In the heat treatment, the heating temperature may be changed stepwise. As a result, the solvent contained in the applied or printed alignment film material evaporates, and the

alignment films

21 and 51 include a polymer compound (a compound before alignment treatment / compound) having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group as a side chain. Is formed. Then, you may perform processes, such as rubbing, as needed.

Here, it is considered that the pre-alignment treatment compound in the

alignment films

21 and 51 is in the state shown in FIG. That is, the compound before alignment treatment includes a main chain Mc (Mc1 to Mc3), a first side chain A containing a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group in the main chain Mc, and further a second side chain. B is included, and the main chains Mc1 to Mc3 are present in an unconnected state. And the 1st side chain A and the 2nd side chain B in this state have faced the random direction by thermal motion.

Next, the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 are arranged so that the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 face each other, and the liquid crystal molecules are arranged between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. The liquid crystal layer 70 including 71 is sealed (step S102). Specifically, spacer protrusions for securing a cell gap, such as plastic beads, are provided on the surface of the TFT substrate 20 or the CF substrate 50 where the

alignment films

21 and 51 are formed. At the same time as spraying, the seal portion is printed by using, for example, an epoxy-based adhesive by a screen printing method. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7, the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 are bonded together with spacer protrusions and a seal portion so that the

alignment films

21 and 51 face each other, and a liquid crystal material containing liquid crystal molecules 71 is obtained. inject. Next, the liquid crystal material is sealed between the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 by curing the seal portion by heating or the like. FIG. 7 illustrates a cross-sectional configuration of the liquid crystal layer 70 sealed between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8, a voltage V1 is applied between the pixel electrode 40 and the counter electrode 60 using voltage applying means (step S103). The voltage V1 is 3 to 30 volts, for example. As a result, an electric field (electric field) in a direction forming a predetermined angle with respect to the surfaces of the first substrate 20 and the second substrate 50 is generated, and the liquid crystal molecules 71A are aligned in a predetermined direction from the vertical direction of the first substrate 20. Is done. Further, the liquid crystal molecules 71 </ b> B are aligned in a predetermined direction from the vertical direction of the second substrate 50. That is, the azimuth angle (deflection angle) of the liquid crystal molecules 71 at this time is defined by the strength and direction of the electric field and the molecular structure of the alignment film material, and the polar angle (zenith angle) is the strength of the electric field and It is defined by the molecular structure of the alignment film material. Then, the inclination angle of the liquid crystal molecules 71 and the second in the vicinity of the interface between the liquid crystal molecules 71A and the second alignment film 51 held in the first alignment film 21 in the vicinity of the interface with the first alignment film 21 in the process described later. The first pretilt angle θ ₁ and the second pretilt angle θ ₂ given to the liquid crystal molecules 71B held in the alignment film 51 are substantially equal. The values of the first pretilt angle θ ₁ and the second pretilt angle θ ₂ of the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B can be controlled by appropriately adjusting the value of the voltage V1. Moreover, the second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure), or alternatively , Having a dipole moment within an angle range of greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from the major axis direction and inducing vertical alignment (the liquid crystal according to the second aspect of the present disclosure) Display device) or, alternatively, having the above structural formula (11) (the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure), the electric field is applied when the voltage V1 is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 71 for applying a pretilt. As a result of the second side chains being aligned in a direction that depends on the direction of the liquid crystal (for example, a direction slightly inclined from the direction of the electric field), the application of pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules can be promoted by the second side chain. Therefore, in the manufacturing process of the liquid crystal display device, the value of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer in order to impart pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules constituting the liquid crystal layer can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9, the

alignment films

21 and 51 are irradiated from the outside of the TFT substrate 20 with, for example, energy rays (specifically, ultraviolet UV) while the voltage V1 is applied. That is, ultraviolet rays are applied while applying an electric field or a magnetic field to the liquid crystal layer so that the liquid crystal molecules 71A are arranged obliquely with respect to the surfaces of the pair of

substrates

20 and 50. As a result, the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group of the compound before the alignment treatment in the

alignment films

21 and 51 is reacted to crosslink the compound before the alignment treatment (step S104). Thus, the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules 71 should respond is memorized by the compound after the alignment treatment, and a pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules 71 in the vicinity of the

alignment films

21 and 51. As a result, a compound is formed after the alignment treatment in the

alignment films

21 and 51, and in the non-driven state, the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B located in the vicinity of the interface with the

first alignment films

21 and 51 in the liquid crystal layer 70 are formed. Pretilt angles θ ₁ and θ ₂ are given. As the ultraviolet ray UV, an ultraviolet ray containing a large amount of light components having a wavelength of about 295 nm to 365 nm is preferable. This is because if ultraviolet rays containing a larger amount of light components in the shorter wavelength region are used, the liquid crystal molecules 71 may be photolyzed and deteriorated. Here, the ultraviolet rays UV are irradiated from the outside of the TFT substrate 20, but may be irradiated from the outside of the CF substrate 50, or may be irradiated from the outside of both the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50. In this case, it is preferable to irradiate ultraviolet rays UV from the substrate side with higher transmittance. Further, when the ultraviolet ray UV is irradiated from the outside of the CF substrate 50, depending on the wavelength range of the ultraviolet ray UV, it may be absorbed by the color filter layer, and the crosslinking reaction may be difficult. For this reason, it is preferable to irradiate from the outside of the TFT substrate 20 (the substrate side having the pixel electrode).

Here, the post-alignment treatment compound in the

alignment films

21 and 51 is in the state shown in FIG. That is, the orientation of the first side chain A having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group introduced into the main chain Mc of the compound before the orientation treatment changes according to the orientation direction of the liquid crystal molecules 71, and the physical distance The first side chains A close to each other react to form a connecting portion Cr. It is considered that the

alignment films

21 and 51 give the first pretilt angle θ ₁ and the second pretilt angle θ ₂ to the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B by the compound after the alignment treatment thus generated. The connecting portion Cr may be formed before the alignment treatment / between the compounds, or may be formed before the alignment treatment / in the compound. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting portion Cr is, for example, between the first side chain A having the main chain Mc1 and the first side chain A of the compound before the alignment treatment having the main chain Mc2. It may be formed by reaction. Further, the connecting portion Cr may be formed by reacting the first side chains A introduced into the same main chain Mc3, for example, like a polymer compound having the main chain Mc3. In the case of a polymerizable functional group, a plurality of first side chains A are bonded. Moreover, as a result of the second side chain B being aligned in a direction depending on the direction of the electric field for applying a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71 (for example, a direction slightly inclined from the direction of the electric field), the second side chain B is Application of a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules can be promoted, and a value of a voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer can be reduced in order to provide a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules constituting the liquid crystal layer in the manufacturing process of the liquid crystal display device.

Through the above steps, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) shown in FIG. 1 was completed.

In the operation of the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element), when a driving voltage is applied to the selected pixel 10, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules 71 included in the liquid crystal layer 70 changes between the pixel electrode 40 and the counter electrode. It changes according to the potential difference between 60. Specifically, in the liquid crystal layer 70, when the driving voltage is applied from the state before the driving voltage is applied as shown in FIG. And the movement propagates to the other liquid crystal molecules 71C. As a result, the liquid crystal molecules 71 respond so as to take a substantially horizontal (parallel) posture with respect to the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50. As a result, the optical characteristics of the liquid crystal layer 70 change, and the incident light to the liquid crystal display element becomes the emitted light modulated, and an image is displayed by gradation expression based on the emitted light.

Here, in a liquid crystal display element that has not been subjected to any pretilt treatment and a liquid crystal display device including the liquid crystal display element, even if the substrate is provided with an alignment regulating portion such as a slit portion for regulating the orientation of liquid crystal molecules When a voltage is applied, the liquid crystal molecules aligned in the direction perpendicular to the substrate are tilted so that the director faces an arbitrary direction in the in-plane direction of the substrate. In this way, in the liquid crystal molecules responding to the driving voltage, the director orientation of each liquid crystal molecule is in a blurred state, and the overall orientation is disturbed. As a result, there is a problem that the response speed (rise speed of image display) becomes slow, the response characteristics deteriorate, and as a result, the display characteristics deteriorate. In addition, when the initial drive voltage is set higher than the drive voltage in the display state and driven (overdrive drive), there are liquid crystal molecules that have responded and liquid crystal molecules that have hardly responded when the initial drive voltage is applied. However, there is a large difference in director inclination between them. After that, when a driving voltage in the display state is applied, the liquid crystal molecules that responded at the time of applying the initial driving voltage are transmitted by the director corresponding to the driving voltage in the display state while the operation hardly propagates to other liquid crystal molecules. It becomes an inclination, and this inclination propagates to other liquid crystal molecules. As a result, the luminance of the display state is reached as a whole pixel when the initial driving voltage is applied, but thereafter, the luminance is lowered and reaches the luminance of the display state again. That is, when overdrive driving is performed, the apparent response speed is faster than when overdrive driving is not performed, but it is difficult to obtain sufficient display quality. These problems are unlikely to occur in an IPS mode or FFS mode liquid crystal display element, and are considered to be unique problems in a VA mode liquid crystal display element.

On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) and the manufacturing method thereof according to the first embodiment, the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 described above are predetermined first with respect to the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B. A pretilt angle θ ₁ and a second pretilt angle θ ₂ are given. This makes it difficult for problems to occur when the pretilt processing is not performed at all, greatly improves the response speed to the drive voltage (rise speed of image display), and improves the display quality during overdrive driving. In addition, since the TFT substrate 20 is provided with the first slit portion 44 as an alignment regulating portion for regulating the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 71, display characteristics such as viewing angle characteristics are ensured, which is favorable. Response characteristics are improved while maintaining display characteristics. In addition, since the liquid crystal molecules have the second pretilt angle θ ₂ by the second alignment film 51, the amount of light transmitted during black display can be reduced, and the contrast can be further improved.

Further, in the conventional method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device (photo-alignment film technology), the alignment film is applied to linearly polarized light or a substrate surface with respect to a precursor film including a predetermined polymer material provided on the substrate surface. It is formed by irradiating light in an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as “oblique light”), and thereby pretilt processing is performed. For this reason, when forming alignment film, there exists a problem that a large light irradiation apparatus, such as an apparatus which irradiates a linearly polarized light, and an apparatus which irradiates oblique light is needed. In addition, forming a pixel having a multi-domain for realizing a wider viewing angle requires a larger apparatus and has a problem that the manufacturing process becomes complicated. In particular, when an alignment film is formed using oblique light, if there are structures such as spacers or irregularities on the substrate, the structure will be shaded and an area where oblique light does not reach is generated. It becomes difficult to regulate the desired orientation. In this case, for example, in order to irradiate oblique light using a photomask in order to provide a multi-domain in a pixel, it is necessary to design a pixel in consideration of light wraparound. That is, when the alignment film is formed using oblique light, there is a problem that it is difficult to form high-definition pixels.

Furthermore, among the conventional photo-alignment film technologies, when a crosslinkable polymer compound is used as the polymer material, the crosslinkable functional group or polymerizable functional group contained in the crosslinkable polymer compound in the precursor film has a thermal motion. Therefore, the probability that the physical distance between the crosslinkable functional groups or the polymerizable functional groups approaches is low. In addition, when irradiated with random light (non-polarized light), the crosslinkable functional group reacts when the physical distance between the crosslinkable functional groups or polymerizable functional groups approaches, but reacts when irradiated with linearly polarized light. Alternatively, the polymerizable functional group needs to align the polarization direction and the reaction site direction in a predetermined direction. Further, the oblique light has a lower irradiation amount per unit area as the irradiation area is wider than the vertical light. That is, the ratio of the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group that reacts to linearly polarized light or oblique light is lower than that in the case where random light (non-polarized light) is irradiated from the direction perpendicular to the substrate surface. Therefore, the crosslinking density (degree of crosslinking) in the formed alignment film tends to be low.

In contrast, in the first embodiment, the

alignment films

21 and 51 including the compound before the alignment treatment are formed, and then the liquid crystal layer 70 is sealed between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. Next, by applying a voltage to the liquid crystal layer 70, the liquid crystal molecules 71 take a predetermined orientation, and the

orientation films

21 and 51 are arranged while the liquid crystal molecules 71 define the direction of the terminal structure of the side chain with respect to the substrate or electrode. Prior to the alignment treatment, the compound is crosslinked or polymerized. Accordingly, the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 that give the first pretilt angle θ ₁ and the second pretilt angle θ ₂ to the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B can be formed. That is, according to the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) and the manufacturing method thereof according to Embodiment 1, the response characteristics can be easily improved without using a large-scale device. In addition, since the pretilt angles θ ₁ and θ ₂ can be given to the liquid crystal molecules 71 without depending on the irradiation direction of ultraviolet rays when the compound is crosslinked or polymerized before the alignment treatment, a high-definition pixel Can be formed. In addition, since the compound is generated before the alignment treatment and after the alignment treatment in a state where the end structure portion of the side chain is aligned in the compound, the degree of crosslinking after the alignment treatment is determined by the above-described conventional manufacturing method. It is thought that it is higher than the film. Therefore, even if it is driven for a long time, it is difficult for a new crosslinked structure to be formed during driving, so that the pretilt angles θ ₁ and θ _{2 of} the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B are maintained at the time of manufacturing, thereby improving the reliability. You can also. In addition, since the second side chain exists, the second side chain is aligned in a direction depending on the direction of the electric field for applying the pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71 (for example, a direction slightly inclined from the direction of the electric field). As a result, provision of a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules can be promoted by the second side chain. Therefore, in the manufacturing process of the liquid crystal display device, the value of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer in order to impart pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules constituting the liquid crystal layer can be reduced.

In this case, in the first embodiment, after the liquid crystal layer 70 is sealed between the

alignment films

21 and 51, the pre-alignment treatment compound in the

alignment films

21 and 51 is crosslinked or polymerized. The transmittance during driving of the element can be changed so as to increase continuously.

In the first embodiment in which the pretilt treatment is performed before the alignment treatment and the cross-linking reaction of the compound after sealing the liquid crystal layer 70, the first slit portion for regulating the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules 71 in the vicinity of the first alignment film 21 44 gives a pretilt according to the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules 71 during driving. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12, since the pretilt directions of the liquid crystal molecules 71 are easily aligned, the order parameter becomes large (close to 1). Thereby, when the liquid crystal display element is driven, the liquid crystal molecules 71 exhibit a uniform behavior, and thus the transmittance continuously increases.

In the first embodiment, the case where the

alignment films

21 and 51 containing the compound mainly containing the main structure including the polyimide structure is used is described. However, the main chain of the compound before the alignment process is polyimide. It is not limited to a thing including a structure. For example, the main chain may include a polysiloxane structure, a polyacrylate structure, a polymethacrylate structure, a maleimide polymer structure, a styrene polymer structure, a styrene / maleimide polymer structure, a polysaccharide structure or a polyvinyl alcohol structure. Of these, pre-alignment treatment compounds having a main chain containing a polysiloxane structure are preferred. This is because the same effect as the polymer compound containing the polyimide structure described above can be obtained. Examples of the pre-alignment treatment compound having a main chain containing a polysiloxane structure include a polymer compound containing a polysilane structure represented by the formula (9). R10 and R11 in the formula (9) are arbitrary as long as they are monovalent groups including carbon, but one of R10 and R11 includes the first side chain. Is preferred. This is because sufficient alignment regulation ability is easily obtained after the alignment treatment and in the compound. Examples of the crosslinkable functional group or polymerizable functional group in this case include the group shown in the above formula (41).

Here, R10 and R11 are monovalent organic groups, and m1 is an integer of 1 or more.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 1, the first slit portion 44 is provided to divide the orientation and improve the viewing angle characteristics. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the first slit portion 44, a protrusion as an alignment regulating portion may be provided on the pixel electrode 40. Providing the protrusions in this way can provide the same effects as when the first slit portion 44 is provided. Alternatively, instead of the first slit portion 44, as will be described later, the same effect as when the first slit portion 44 is provided can be obtained by providing the pixel electrode 40 with an uneven portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first alignment film 21 covering the TFT substrate, which is the first substrate 20, contains the compound after alignment treatment, and the first substrate (TFT substrate) in the liquid crystal layer 70. Although the first pretilt angle θ ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 71A located on the 20 side, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, the first substrate 20 can be a CF substrate, and the second substrate 50 can be a TFT substrate. In this case, the same effect as the liquid crystal display device shown in FIG. 1 can be obtained. be able to. However, since various lateral electric fields are generated in the TFT substrate during driving, it is desirable to adopt a modification of the liquid crystal display device of FIG. 2 in which the second substrate 50 is the TFT substrate. Thereby, the alignment disorder of the liquid crystal molecules 71 due to the transverse electric field can be effectively reduced.

Next, other embodiments will be described. Components that are the same as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. Also, operations and effects similar to those of the first embodiment are omitted as appropriate. Furthermore, the various technical items described in the first embodiment are also applied to the following embodiments as appropriate.

[Embodiment 2]
The second embodiment also relates to a liquid crystal display device of the present disclosure and a method for manufacturing the liquid crystal display device according to the second and third aspects of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, after the alignment treatment, the compound has a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group in the compound having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group as the first side chain. Alternatively, it can be obtained by polymerization. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the compound after the alignment treatment is obtained based on the compound before the alignment treatment that has a photosensitive functional group as a first side chain that is deformed by irradiation with energy rays.

Here, also in the second embodiment, the

alignment films

21 and 51 are one type of polymer compound (after alignment treatment / compound) having a first side chain having a crosslinked structure and a second side chain. Or it is comprised including 2 or more types. As described above, the second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment (the liquid crystal display device according to the first aspect of the present disclosure). Or a structure having a dipole moment within an angle range of more than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from the major axis direction and inducing vertical orientation (the second of the present disclosure) A liquid crystal display device according to an aspect), or the structural formula (11), more specifically, the structural formula (12) (a liquid crystal display device according to a third aspect of the present disclosure). The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by the deformed compound. Here, after the alignment treatment, the alignment film 21 includes one or more of polymer compounds (pre-alignment treatment / compound) having a main chain and first and second side chains. , 51 is formed, and then a liquid crystal layer 70 is provided, and then the polymer compound is deformed, or more specifically, the polymer compound is irradiated with energy rays, and more specifically, an electric field or a magnetic field is applied. However, it is generated by deforming the photosensitive functional group contained in the first side chain. Such a state is shown in the conceptual diagram of FIG. 14, but the second side chain is not shown in FIG. In FIG. 14, the direction of the arrow with “UV” and the direction of the arrow with “voltage” do not indicate the direction in which ultraviolet rays are applied or the direction of the applied electric field. After the alignment treatment, the compound includes a structure in which liquid crystal molecules are arranged in a predetermined direction (specifically, an oblique direction) with respect to one of the pair of substrates (TFT substrate 20 or CF substrate 50). As described above, by aligning the polymer compound in the

alignment films

21 and 51 by deforming the polymer compound or irradiating the polymer compound with energy rays, the

alignment films

21 and 51 contain the compound. Since a pretilt can be given to the liquid crystal molecules 71 in the vicinity, the response speed (rise speed of image display) is increased, and the display characteristics are improved. In addition, since the second side chain exists, when a voltage is applied to apply pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71, the second side chain is present in a direction depending on the direction of the electric field (for example, a direction slightly inclined from the direction of the electric field). As a result of the alignment of the two side chains, provision of pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules can be promoted by the second side chain. Therefore, in the manufacturing process of the liquid crystal display device, the value of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer in order to impart pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules constituting the liquid crystal layer can be reduced.

Examples of photosensitive functional groups include azobenzene compounds having an azo group, compounds having an imine and aldimine in the skeleton (referred to as “aldiminebenzene” for convenience), and compounds having a styrene skeleton (referred to as “stilbene” for convenience). can do. These compounds can impart a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules as a result of deformation in response to energy rays (for example, ultraviolet rays), that is, as a result of transition from a trans state to a cis state.

Specific examples of “X” in the azobenzene compound represented by the formula (AZ-0) include the following formulas (AZ-1) to (AZ-9).

Here, one of R and R ″ is bonded to a benzene ring containing diamine directly or via ether, ester, etc., and the other is a terminal group, and R, R ′, and R ″ are hydrogen. It is a monovalent group having an atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or a carbonate group, or a derivative thereof, and the terminal groups are R ₂ ′ in the formula (1) and R in the formula (2). ₁₃ 'may be included. By doing so, it is possible to more easily provide the tilt. R ″ is directly bonded to a benzene ring containing a diamine or via an ether, an ester or the like.

The liquid crystal display device and the manufacturing method thereof according to the second embodiment are basically the same except that the pre-alignment treatment compound having a photosensitive functional group accompanied by deformation caused by irradiation with energy rays (specifically, ultraviolet rays) is used. Since it can be substantially the same as the liquid crystal display device and the manufacturing method thereof described in Embodiment 1, detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Embodiment 3]
The third embodiment also relates to a liquid crystal display device according to the present disclosure, and further relates to a method for manufacturing the liquid crystal display device according to the third aspect of the present disclosure. In Embodiment 3, a binding side chain in which the first side chain and the second side chain shown in Structural Formula (13) are combined is used. Specifically, examples of the binding side chain include structures represented by the aforementioned formulas (G-K01) to (G-K12). The ring R, ring X, and A ₁ to A ₄ in the formula (13) are the same as the above-mentioned (G-A01) to (GA20), (G-B01) to (GB20), (G-C01) to Formula (G-C16), Formula (G-D01) to Formula (G-D16), Formula (GE01) to Formula (GE02), Formula (G-F01) to Formula ( G-F12), formulas (G-H01) to formulas (G-H12), and formulas (G-J01) to formulas (GJ14) can be substituted. The compound after the alignment treatment is obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing the crosslinkable functional group or the polymerizable functional group in the compound before the alignment treatment having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group as a binding side chain.

Here, also in Embodiment 3, the bonding side chain in the polymer compound constituting the

alignment films

21 and 51 has the structural formula (13). The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a crosslinked or polymerized compound. After the alignment treatment, the compound is formed of the

alignment films

21 and 51 in a state containing one or two or more polymer compounds having a main chain and a bonding side chain (before the alignment treatment). And then, by crosslinking or polymerizing the polymer compound, more specifically, a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group (specifically, “ Produced by reacting A ₀₂ "). After the alignment treatment, the compound has a structure (specifically) in which liquid crystal molecules are arranged in a predetermined direction (specifically, oblique direction) with respect to a pair of substrates (specifically, the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50). In particular, it contains a binding side chain). As described above, the polymer compound (before the alignment treatment / compound) is crosslinked or polymerized, and after the alignment treatment / the compound is contained in the

alignment films

21 and 51, the liquid crystal molecules 71 in the vicinity of the

alignment films

21 and 51 are formed. On the other hand, since a pretilt can be given, the response speed (rise speed of image display) is increased, and the display characteristics are improved.

In the manufacturing method of the liquid crystal display device of the third embodiment,
A first alignment film 21 made of a polymer compound having a binding side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates (specifically, the substrate 20), and the other of the pair of substrates (specifically, the substrate 50) is formed. After forming the second alignment film 51,
A pair of

substrates

20 and 50 are arranged such that the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 face each other, and a negative dielectric constant anisotropic is provided between the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. Sealing the liquid crystal layer 70 including the liquid crystal molecules 71 having the property,
The bonding side chain in the polymer compound is crosslinked or polymerized to give the liquid crystal molecules 71 a pretilt.

And since the bond side chain has the characteristics as described above, when an electric field for applying a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules 71 is applied, the direction depends on the direction of the electric field (for example, slightly inclined from the direction of the electric field). As a result of the alignment of the second side chains in the direction), it is possible to promote the application of pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules by the second side chains. As a result, in the manufacturing process of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to reduce the value of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer in order to impart pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules constituting the liquid crystal layer.

Example 1 is a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure, a manufacturing method thereof, and a liquid crystal display according to the first to third aspects of the present disclosure. The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a device (liquid crystal display element). In Example 1, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) shown in FIG. 1 was produced according to the following procedure.

First, a TFT substrate 20 and a CF substrate 50 were prepared. As the TFT substrate 20, a substrate was used in which a pixel electrode 40 made of ITO having a slit pattern (line width 4 μm, line spacing 4 μm: slit portion 44) was formed on one side of a 0.7 mm thick glass substrate. Further, as the CF substrate 50, a substrate in which a counter electrode 60 made of ITO was formed over the entire surface of a color filter layer of a 0.7 mm thick glass substrate on which the color filter layer was formed was used. An oblique electric field is applied between the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 by the slit pattern formed in the pixel electrode 40.

Meanwhile, alignment film materials for the first alignment film and the second alignment film were prepared.

In this case, for example, first, in order to obtain Example 1-A to Example 1-L, a compound having a crosslinkable functional group represented by formula (A-8) as a diamine compound, formula (C-1) A compound having a group capable of following the liquid crystal molecules 71 shown, a compound constituting the various second side chains represented by the formula (12) shown below, and a tetracarboxylic acid shown in the formula (E-2) The dianhydride was dissolved in N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) in molar ratios of 12.5%, 2.5%, 35%, 50%. In the compounds constituting the various second side chains shown in Table 1, m-phenylenediamine is bonded to “A ₀ ”.

Alternatively, in order to obtain Example 1-M, the compound having a crosslinkable functional group represented by the formula (A-8) as the diamine compound and the liquid crystal molecule 71 represented by the formula (C-1) can be used. A compound having a group, a compound having a bonding side chain represented by the formula (G-K07), and a tetracarboxylic dianhydride represented by the formula (E-2) in a molar ratio of 7.5%, 2.5% %, 40% and 50% were dissolved in N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP).

Subsequently, each of these solutions was reacted at 60 ° C. for 6 hours, and then a large excess of pure water was poured into the solution after the reaction to precipitate the reaction product. Next, the precipitated solid is separated, washed with pure water, and dried under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. for 15 hours, thereby synthesizing a polyamic acid which is a polymer compound precursor as a compound before alignment treatment. It was done. Finally, 3.0 g of the obtained polyamic acid was dissolved in NMP to obtain a solution having a solid content concentration of 3% by mass, and then filtered through a 0.2 μm filter. Thus, alignment film materials (Example 1-A to Example 1-M) for forming the

alignment films

21 and 51 were obtained.

The compound constituting the second side chain is a compound such as A ₁ , A ₂ , A ₃ , A ₄ or the like in the ring X and the ring R in the structural formula (11), the structural formula (12), or the structural formula (13). This group can be introduced by a known general organic synthesis method. Typical synthesis examples are “New Experimental Chemistry Course 14 Synthesis and Reaction of Organic Compounds”, Maruzen Co., Ltd. (1978), or “Fourth Edition Experimental Chemistry Course 19 to 26 Organic Synthesis I to VIII”, Maruzen Stock The method published in a company (1991) etc. can be mentioned.

Specifically, for example, a compound obtained by reacting an arylboric acid (21) with a compound (22) synthesized by a known method in the presence of a catalyst such as an aqueous carbonate solution and tetrakis (triphenylphosphine) palladium. Synthesize (1A). Alternatively, compound (1A) is prepared by reacting compound (23) synthesized by a known method with n-butyllithium and then with zinc chloride in the presence of a catalyst such as dichlorobis (triphenylphosphine) palladium. It can also be synthesized by reacting compound (22). “MSG” represents mesogen.

Alternatively, compound (24) is reduced with a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride to obtain compound (25). This compound (25) is halogenated with hydrobromic acid to obtain the compound (26). And the compound which comprises a 2nd side chain can also be obtained by synthesize | combining a compound (1B) by making a compound (26) react with a compound (27) in presence of potassium carbonate.

Next, the prepared alignment film material (see Table 1) was applied to each of the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 using a spin coater, and then the applied film was dried on an 80 ° C. hot plate for 80 seconds. Thereafter, the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 were heated in an oven at 200 ° C. for 1 hour in a nitrogen gas atmosphere. Thus, the first alignment film 21 having a thickness of 90 nm on the pixel electrode 40 was formed, and the CF substrate 50 having a thickness of 90 nm on the second alignment film 51 on the counter electrode 60 was manufactured.

Next, a seal portion is formed on the periphery of the pixel portion on the CF substrate 50 by applying an ultraviolet curable resin containing silica particles having a particle diameter of 3.5 μm, and a negative dielectric constant is formed in a portion surrounded by the seal portion. A liquid crystal material composed of MLC-7029 (manufactured by Merck), which is a negative type liquid crystal having anisotropy, was dropped. Thereafter, the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 were bonded together, and the seal portion was cured. Subsequently, it heated in 120 degreeC oven for 1 hour, and the seal | sticker part was hardened | cured completely. As a result, various liquid crystal display devices including a liquid crystal cell in which the liquid crystal layer 70 was sealed could be completed.

Thereafter, 500 mJ (measurement at a wavelength of 365 nm) is uniform in a state where a rectangular wave AC electric field (60 Hz) having an effective voltage of 5 volts, 10 volts, and 20 volts is applied to the liquid crystal cell thus fabricated. UV light was irradiated to react the compound before alignment treatment in the

alignment films

21 and 51. As a result, the

alignment films

21 and 51 containing the compound after the alignment treatment were formed on the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50. As described above, liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display elements) in which the

liquid crystal molecules

71A and 71B on the TFT substrate 20 and the CF substrate 50 side have various pretilt angles can be completed (see FIG. 1). Finally, a pair of polarizing plates was attached to the outside of the liquid crystal display device so that the absorption axes were orthogonal.

As Comparative Example 1-A and Comparative Example 1-B, as shown in Table 1, alignment film materials were prepared in the same manner as the alignment film materials of Examples, except that the materials used were different. Specifically, a compound having a crosslinkable functional group represented by formula (A-8), a compound having a vertical alignment inducing structure represented by formula (C-1) or (C-2), and a regulator 1,4-phenylenediamine represented by formula (J-1) and tetracarboxylic dianhydride represented by formula (E-2) in a molar ratio of 12.5%, 2.5%, 35%, 50% was dissolved in N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) to prepare a liquid crystal display device in the same manner as described above.

For the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) using these alignment film materials, the response time (rise time of image display) and the pretilt angle θ were measured. The results are shown in Table 2.

When measuring the response time, an LCD 5200 (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.) is used as a measuring device, a driving voltage (7.5 volts) is applied between the pixel electrode 40 and the counter electrode 60, and a luminance of 10 % To a luminance of 90% of the gradation corresponding to the driving voltage (rise time of image display) was measured. When the rise time is 10 milliseconds or less, the response time is good, and in Table 2, “response ○” is shown. On the other hand, when the rise time exceeds 10 milliseconds, the response time is regarded as defective, and in Table 2, “response x” is shown.

Further, when the pretilt angle θ of the liquid crystal molecules 71 is examined, it conforms to a known method (method described in TJ Schefer et al., J. Appl. Phys., Vol. 19, page 2013, 1980). It was measured by a crystal rotation method using a He—Ne laser beam. As described above and shown in FIG. 4, the pretilt angle θ is set in the Z direction when the drive voltage is off when the direction perpendicular to the surfaces of the substrates 20 and 50 (normal direction) is Z. The tilt angle of the director D of the liquid crystal molecules 71 (71A, 71B) with respect to.

[Table 1]

[Table 2]

When Example 1-A to Example 1-M and Comparative Example 1-A to Comparative Example 1-B are compared, in Comparative Examples 1-A to 1-B, the applied voltage during the pretilt process is 5 volts. The response time was poor at 10 volts and the response time was good at 20 volts, whereas in Examples 1-A to 1-M, the response was applied even when the applied voltage during pretilt processing was 5 volts. Time: Good. Further, in the case where the applied voltage was the same, in Example 1-A to Example 1-M, a pretilt angle θ larger than that in Comparative Example 1-A to Comparative Example 1-B could be obtained. That is, it becomes possible to realize pretilt application at a relatively low voltage, and it is possible to perform pretilt application with a cheaper power supply device that does not require a high voltage. It was found that a liquid crystal display device capable of easily improving response characteristics without using a large-scale manufacturing apparatus can be manufactured.

By the way, when the slit portion is formed in the first electrode, there is a portion where an electric field is not applied in the slit composed of minute lines and spaces, and the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules when the voltage is applied near the edge of the line. However, since the twist structure is adopted, there is a possibility that a problem that the light transmittance is lowered may occur.

In Example 2, the configuration and structure of the first electrode are modified. Specifically, in Example 2, instead of forming the slit portion in the first electrode, the first electrode is formed with a plurality of concave and convex portions, which ensures the occurrence of the above problem. Can be avoided. Such a form is referred to as “first structure of the first electrode”.

Alternatively, the first electrode may be formed with a plurality of concavo-convex portions, and at least a space between the recesses of the first electrode may be embedded with a planarizing layer. In such a form, the portion where the liquid crystal molecules contact on the first electrode side is flat or substantially flat. Therefore, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules can be made uniform, and as a result, the light transmittance of the liquid crystal display device can be made uniform. Such a form is referred to as a “second structure of the first electrode”.

In the second structure of the first electrode, when the maximum height of the top surface of the planarization layer is H _H and the minimum height of the top surface of the planarization layer is H _L on the basis of the bottom surface of the recess,
0.5 ≦ H _L / H _H ≦ 1
Preferably
0.8 ≦ H _L / H _H ≦ 1
Is preferably satisfied.

Further, in the second structure of the first electrode including the preferred embodiment described above, when the height of the convex portion relative to the bottom surface of the recess was H _C,
0.5 ≦ H _H / H _C ≦ 5
Preferably
0.75 ≦ H _H / H _C ≦ 1.5
Is preferably satisfied.

Furthermore, in the second structure of the electrode including the preferred embodiment described above,
The planarization layer covers the first electrode;
A first alignment film covering the planarization layer and a second alignment film covering the second electrode;
The liquid crystal molecules can have a form in which a pretilt is given at least by the first alignment film. Such a form is referred to as a “first electrode of the first type” for convenience. Alternatively,
The planarization layer covers the first electrode;
A first alignment film covering the first electrode and a second alignment film covering the second electrode;
The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by at least the first alignment film,
The first alignment film can have a form corresponding to the planarization layer. Such a form is referred to as a “second type first electrode” for convenience. Alternatively,
The planarization layer fills between the recesses of the first electrode,
A first alignment film covering the first electrode and the planarization layer, and a second alignment film covering the second electrode;
The liquid crystal molecules can have a form in which a pretilt is given at least by the first alignment film. Such a form is referred to as a “third type first electrode” for convenience.

Here, examples of the material constituting the planarization layer in the first electrode of the first type or the first electrode of the third type include high-molecular compound materials such as resist materials, photosensitive polyimide resins, and acrylic resins. And inorganic materials such as SiO ₂ , SiN, and SiON. Moreover, the material which comprises the 1st alignment film in this indication can be mentioned as a material which comprises the planarization layer in the 2nd type 1st electrode. Although the planarizing layer depends on the material used, it can be formed on the basis of various coating methods, or on the basis of physical vapor deposition methods (PVD methods) such as various vacuum deposition methods and sputtering methods. Alternatively, they can be formed based on various chemical vapor deposition methods (CVD methods). Whether the space between the recesses of the first electrode is buried by the planarizing layer or whether the first electrode is covered depends on the composition of the composition including the material constituting the planarizing layer and the material constituting the planarizing layer. And characteristics (for example, solid content concentration and viscosity, solvent used), the formation method and formation conditions of the planarization layer, and the like. The alignment film can also be formed based on, for example, various coating methods.

Here, various printing methods such as screen printing method, ink jet printing method, offset printing method, reverse offset printing method, gravure printing method, gravure offset printing method, letterpress printing, flexographic printing, microcontact method, etc. as spin coating method ; Air doctor coater method, blade coater method, rod coater method, knife coater method, squeeze coater method, reverse roll coater method, transfer roll coater method, gravure coater method, kiss coater method, cast coater method, spray coater method, slit coater method , Slit orifice coater method, cap coat method, calendar coater method, casting method, capillary coater method, bar coater method, dipping method, various coating methods; spray method; dispenser The method used: such stamping method may be a method of applying the liquid material.

Here, in the first type first electrode to the third type first electrode, when the average film thickness of the first alignment film is T ₁ and the average film thickness of the second alignment film is T ₂ ,
0.5 ≦ T ₂ / T ₁ ≦ 1.5
Preferably
0.8 ≦ T ₂ / T ₁ ≦ 1.2
Is preferably satisfied. Here, the average film thickness of the alignment film is a value obtained by dividing the volume of the alignment film that occupies one pixel (or one subpixel) by the area of one pixel (or one subpixel). Thus, by defining the value of T ₂ / T ₁ , that is, by making the average film thickness of the first alignment film equal to or approximately equal to the average film thickness of the second alignment film, Generation | occurrence | production of seizure etc. can be prevented reliably.

In the first structure of the first electrode or the second structure of the first electrode, a plurality of stepped portions can be formed on the convex portion provided on the first electrode. Such a configuration is referred to as “a 3rd A structure of the first electrode” for convenience.

In the 3A structure of the first electrode, since a plurality of step portions (differences in height) are formed in the convex portion, the electric field strength is generated in the convex portion, or a lateral electric field is generated. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules at the convex portions can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules at the convex portions can be reliably defined. Therefore, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining good voltage response characteristics, reducing the cost of the light source constituting the backlight, and reducing power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

In the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode, and the 3A structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex part passes through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and from the stem ridge to the periphery of the pixel It can be set as the form comprised from the several branch convex part extended toward a part. For convenience, such a form is referred to as “first electrode 1-1 structure”, “first electrode 2-1 structure”, and “first electrode 3A-1 structure”. Here, in the 1-1 structure of the first electrode, the 2-1 structure of the first electrode, and the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode, each of the trunk protrusions extending in a cross shape is represented by the X axis, Y Assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system as an axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases. Such an arrangement state of the branch protrusions is called a multi-domain electrode structure, and since regions having different branch protrusion extension directions are formed in one pixel, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved. it can.

The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend at an axis of 45 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant have an axis of 135 degrees with the X axis. The plurality of branch protrusions that occupy the third quadrant extend at an axis of 225 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of branch protrusions that occupy the fourth quadrant have an axis of 315 degrees with the X axis. However, the present invention is not limited to these values (angles). The same applies to the following.

Then, in the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode including the preferred embodiment described above, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is the stem convex It can be set as the form which has a cross-sectional shape from which the level | step-difference part descend | falls toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of a trunk convex part from the center of the cross-sectional shape of a part. And in the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the stem convex portion Can have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the trunk convex portion toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion.

Furthermore, in the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-section of the branch protrusion when the branch protrusion is cut along a virtual vertical plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the branch protrusion The shape may have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. Then, in the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-sectional shape of the branch protrusion when the branch protrusion is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch protrusion May have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion.

Further, in the first electrode 1-1 structure, the first electrode 2-1 structure, and the first electrode 3A-1 structure including the various preferred embodiments described above, the first electrode 3A-1 structure corresponds to the trunk convex portion. It can be set as the form by which the orientation control part is formed in the part of the 2nd electrode. Here, the orientation restricting portion may be formed from a slit portion provided in the second electrode, or may be formed from a protrusion provided in the second electrode, or Moreover, it can also comprise from the part of the 2nd electrode used as the protrusion shape. The protrusion is made of, for example, a resist material, and the second electrode is not formed thereon. In order to provide the protruding portion of the second electrode, a convex portion may be formed on the lower side of the second electrode, or, alternatively, by a method similar to the convex portion forming method of the concave and convex portions in the first electrode. It is also possible to provide a protruding portion of the second electrode. It is desirable that the width of the slit portion or the protruding portion or the protruding second electrode portion is narrower than the width of the trunk convex portion. The same can be applied to the 3B-1 structure of the first electrode and the 3C structure of the first electrode, which will be described later.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode, and the 3A structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion includes a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel, and a stem convex portion. It can be set as the form comprised from the several branch convex part extended toward the pixel inside from a part. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 1-2 structure”, “first electrode 2-2 structure”, and “first electrode 3A-2 structure” for convenience. Here, in the 1-2 structure of the first electrode, the 2-2 structure of the first electrode, and the 3A-2 structure of the first electrode, a straight line passing through the pixel center and parallel to the pixel periphery. Assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system with each of X axis and Y axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases.

Then, in the 3A-2 structure of the first electrode including the above preferred embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is the stem convex It can be set as the form which has a cross-sectional shape from which the level | step-difference part descend | falls toward the inner edge of the cross-sectional shape of a trunk convex part from the outer edge of the cross-sectional shape of a part.

Furthermore, in the 3A-2 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-section of the branch protrusion when the branch protrusion is cut along a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch protrusion. The shape may have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. Then, in the 3A-2 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion May have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion.

Furthermore, in the first electrode 1-2 structure, the first electrode 2-2 structure, and the first electrode 3A-2 structure including various preferred embodiments described above, the first electrode includes: A slit portion or a protrusion portion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel can be formed. The protrusion is made of, for example, a resist material, and the first electrode is not formed thereon. Alternatively, the first electrode may have a cross-shaped convex portion that passes through the center of the pixel and is surrounded by the concave portion. Such a cross-shaped convex part can be provided by forming a cross-shaped convex part on the lower side of the first electrode, or by a method similar to the method of forming the concave-convex part in the first electrode. It is also possible to provide it. Alternatively, instead of providing the slit portion or the protrusion (rib), a cross-shaped concave portion that passes through the pixel center portion may be provided. The same applies to the 3B-2 structure of the first electrode and the 3D structure of the first electrode, which will be described later.

Furthermore, the 1-1 structure of the first electrode, the 1-2 structure of the first electrode, the 2-1 structure of the first electrode, the 2-2 structure of the first electrode, and the various preferred embodiments described above. In the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode or the 3A-2 structure of the first electrode including the form,
A convex structure is formed from a portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to a portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The peripheral part of the concavo-convex part may be formed on a convex structure. The convex structure may be formed based on a black matrix made of a known material.

The first electrode 1-1 structure and the first electrode 1-2 structure may be combined, or the first electrode 2-1 structure and the first electrode 2-2 structure may be combined. Also good. That is, the concavo-convex portion passes through the center of the pixel and joins the trunk convex portion extending in a cross shape, the plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion, and the plurality of branch convex portions, and the pixel peripheral portion It can also be set as the form comprised from the trunk convex part formed in frame shape. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 1-3 structure” and “first electrode 2-3 structure” for convenience. Here, even in the 1-3 structure of the first electrode and the 2-3 structure of the first electrode, the (X, Y) coordinate system having the X-axis and the Y-axis as the trunk convex portions extending in a cross shape is used. Assuming
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode,
A convex structure is formed from a portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to a portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The peripheral part of the concavo-convex part may be formed on a convex structure. Such a configuration is referred to as a “3B structure of the first electrode” for convenience.

In the 3rd B structure of the 1st electrode, since the peripheral part of an uneven part is formed on a convex structure, compared with the case where the peripheral part of an uneven part is flat, a much stronger electric field arises in the peripheral part of an uneven part . As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the peripheral part of the uneven part can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the peripheral part of the uneven part can be defined reliably. Therefore, good voltage response characteristics can be maintained. The configuration and structure of the 3B structure of the first electrode is the same as that of the first electrode including the 1-1 structure of the first electrode, the 1-2 structure of the first electrode, and the 1-3 structure of the first electrode. The second structure of the first electrode can be applied to the first structure, including the 2-1 structure of the first electrode, the 2-2 structure of the first electrode, and the 2-3 structure of the first electrode. It can also be applied.

Further, in the 3B structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion includes a trunk convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion. It can be set as a form. Such a form is referred to as “the 3rd B-1 structure of the first electrode” for convenience. Here, in the 3B-1 structure of the first electrode, assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system in which each of the trunk convex portions extending in a cross shape is an X axis and a Y axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases.

Then, in the 3B-1 structure of the first electrode including the above-described preferable form, it is possible to adopt a form in which an orientation restricting portion is formed in the portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion. Here, the orientation restricting portion may be formed from a slit portion provided in the second electrode, or may be formed from a protrusion provided in the second electrode.

Alternatively, in the 3B structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion includes a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel peripheral portion and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel. It can be set as a form. Such a form is referred to as “a third B-2 structure of the first electrode” for convenience. Here, in the 3B-2 structure of the first electrode, an (X, Y) coordinate system is assumed in which straight lines that pass through the center of the pixel and are parallel to the periphery of the pixel are the X axis and the Y axis. When
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases.

In the 3B-2 structure of the first electrode including the above-described preferable form, the first electrode is formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel. be able to.

Furthermore, in the 3B structure of the first electrode including the various preferable forms described above, the convex structure may be formed based on a black matrix made of a known material.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode,
The concavo-convex portion is composed of a stem convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the stem convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion,
An orientation regulating portion may be formed on the portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion. Such a configuration is referred to as a “3C structure of the first electrode” for convenience.

In the 3C structure of the first electrode, since the orientation restricting portion is formed in the portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion, the electric field generated by the second electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the orientation restricting portion. Alternatively, the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in the vicinity of the alignment regulating portion is defined. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion can be reliably defined. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

Further, in the 3C structure of the first electrode, the orientation restricting portion can be formed from a slit portion provided in the second electrode, or alternatively formed from a protrusion provided in the second electrode. It can be.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode,
The concavo-convex part is composed of a stem convex part formed in a frame shape around the pixel peripheral part, and a plurality of branch convex parts extending from the stem convex part toward the inside of the pixel,
The first electrode may have a structure in which a slit portion or a protrusion portion that passes through the center portion of the pixel and is parallel to the peripheral portion of the pixel is formed. Such a configuration is referred to as “a 3D structure of the first electrode” for convenience.

In the 3D structure of the first electrode, the first electrode has a slit or protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel, so there is no slit or protrusion. Compared with the case where a flat recess is formed in the first electrode, the electric field generated by the first electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the slit, or the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in the vicinity of the protrusion or the alignment regulating portion. Is defined. As a result, it is possible to increase the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion or the projection portion, and to reliably define the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion or the projection portion. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

In the 3D structure of the first electrode, the black matrix can be formed such that the projected image of the portion of the first substrate located between the pixels and the projected image of the black matrix overlap. The black matrix can be formed such that the projected image of the region extending from the first substrate portion located between the pixels to the end of the concavo-convex portion and the projected image of the black matrix overlap.

Examples of the width of the branch convex portion and the concave portion include 1 μm to 20 μm, preferably 2 μm to 10 μm. If the widths of the branch convex portions and the concave portions are less than 1 μm, it is difficult to form the branch convex portions and the concave portions, and it may be impossible to secure a sufficient manufacturing yield. On the other hand, if the widths of the branch convex portions and the concave portions exceed 20 μm, it is difficult to generate a favorable oblique electric field between the first electrode and the second electrode when a driving voltage is applied to the first electrode and the second electrode. There is. Examples of the width of the trunk convex portion include 2 × 10 ⁻⁶ m to 2 × 10 ⁻⁵ m, preferably 4 × 10 ⁻⁶ m to 1.5 × 10 ⁻⁵ m. Examples of the height from the concave portion to the convex portion closest to the concave portion include 5 × 10 ⁻⁸ m to 1 × 10 ⁻⁶ m, preferably 1 × 10 ⁻⁷ m to 5 × 10 ⁻⁷ m. The height of each step portion in the convex portion (the difference in height between the adjacent top surfaces of the convex portions constituting the step portion) is 5 × 10 ⁻⁸ m to 1 × 10 ⁻⁶ m, preferably 1 × 10 ^-7 m to 5 × 10 ^-7 m can be exemplified. As a result, good orientation control can be achieved, a sufficient production yield can be secured, and a decrease in light transmittance and an extension of process time can be prevented.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode and the second structure of the first electrode, the width of a part of the convex portion provided on the first electrode is narrowed toward the tip. it can. Such a configuration is referred to as “fourth structure of the first electrode” for convenience.

In the fourth structure of the first electrode, the first electrode has a plurality of concave and convex portions, and the width of a part of the convex portions provided on the first electrode is narrower toward the tip portion. It has become. Therefore, the generation of dark lines can be further reduced. That is, a more uniform high light transmittance can be realized, and generation of dark lines can be suppressed.

In the fourth structure of the first electrode,
The concavo-convex portion is composed of a stem convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the stem convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion,
A plurality of branch protrusions correspond to a part of the protrusions provided on the first electrode,
The width of the branch convex portion may be such that the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion is the widest and narrows from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip portion. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 4A structure” for convenience. In addition, two opposite sides of the branch convex portion from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion to the tip portion are referred to as “side sides” for convenience.

In the 4A structure of the first electrode, when assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system with the X-axis and the Y-axis as the trunk convex portions extending in a cross shape,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases. The same applies to the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode and the 4D-1 structure of the first electrode, which will be described later.

Alternatively, in the fourth structure of the first electrode,
The concavo-convex part is composed of a stem convex part formed in a frame shape around the pixel peripheral part, and a plurality of branch convex parts extending from the stem convex part toward the inside of the pixel,
A plurality of branch protrusions correspond to a part of the protrusions provided on the first electrode,
The width of the branch convex portion may be such that the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion is the widest and narrows from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip portion. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 4B structure” for convenience.

In the 4B structure of the first electrode, assuming a (X, Y) coordinate system in which straight lines passing through the center of the pixel and parallel to the periphery of the pixel are the X axis and the Y axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can adopt a form extending in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases. The same can be applied to the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode and the 4D-2 structure of the first electrode, which will be described later.

In the 4A structure of the first electrode or the 4B structure of the first electrode, the width of the branch convex portion is linearly narrowed from the portion joining the trunk convex portion to the tip portion (the branch convex portion is Each side side to be configured is configured by one line segment, and the rate of change in width is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each side constituting the portion may be formed of a single smooth curve, and the rate of change of the width may be changed), or each side constituting the branching convex portion may include two or more line segments. Or it can also be set as the form comprised from the curve, and can also be set as the form (form which each side which comprises a branch convex part is step shape) narrowed stepwise.

In the 4A structure of the first electrode including the preferable form described above, the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex part may be formed with an orientation regulating part. As described above, when the alignment restricting portion is formed in the portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion, the electric field generated by the second electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion, or the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion. The direction of falling is defined. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion can be reliably defined. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

In the 4B structure of the first electrode including the preferred embodiment described above, the first electrode may be formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel. it can. Note that no electrodes are formed on the slits or protrusions. In this way, if a slit or protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel is formed in the first electrode, a flat recess without the slit or protrusion is formed in the first electrode. Compared with the case where the electric field is generated, the electric field generated by the first electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the slit, or the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted in the vicinity of the protrusion is defined. As a result, it is possible to increase the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion or the projection portion, and to reliably define the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion or the projection portion. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

In the fourth structure of the first electrode, a plurality of stepped portions can be formed on the convex portion provided on the first electrode. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 4C structure” for convenience. In this way, if a plurality of step portions (height difference) are formed on the convex portion, the electric field strength or weakness occurs in the convex portion, or a lateral electric field occurs. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules at the convex portions can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules at the convex portions can be reliably defined. Therefore, when displaying an image, for example, a dark line hardly occurs in an image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

In the 4C structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion includes a trunk convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion. It can be. Such a form is referred to as a “first electrode 4C-1 structure” for convenience. The 4C-1 structure of the first electrode is substantially a combination of the 4A structure of the first electrode and the 4C structure of the first electrode.

Then, in the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode including the above preferred embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is the stem convex It can be set as the form which has a cross-sectional shape from which the level | step-difference part descend | falls toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of a trunk convex part from the center of the cross-sectional shape of a part. Then, in the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-sectional shape of the trunk convex portion when the trunk convex portion is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the trunk convex portion Can have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the trunk convex portion toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion.

Furthermore, in the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross section of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut along a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion. The shape may have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. Then, in the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion May have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion.

Further, in the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode including the various preferable forms described above, the orientation restricting portion may be formed in the portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion. it can. In the 4A structure of the first electrode or the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode, the orientation restricting portion can be formed by a slit portion provided in the second electrode, or alternatively, the second electrode It can be configured by a provided protrusion, or can be configured by a protruding second electrode portion. The protrusion is made of, for example, a resist material, and the second electrode is not formed thereon. In order to provide the protruding portion of the second electrode, a convex portion may be formed on the lower side of the second electrode, or, alternatively, by a method similar to the convex portion forming method of the concave and convex portions in the first electrode. It is also possible to provide a protruding portion of the second electrode. In the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode, it is desirable that the width of the slit portion or the protruding portion or the protruding portion of the second electrode is narrower than the width of the trunk protruding portion. The same can be applied to the 4D-1 structure of the first electrode described later.

Alternatively, in the 4C structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion is constituted by a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel. It can be set as a form. Such a form is referred to as a “first electrode 4C-2 structure” for convenience. The 4C-2 structure of the first electrode is substantially a combination of the 4B structure of the first electrode and the 4C structure of the first electrode.

Then, in the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode including the preferred embodiment described above, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is the stem convex It can be set as the form which has a cross-sectional shape from which the level | step-difference part descend | falls toward the inner edge of the cross-sectional shape of a trunk convex part from the outer edge of the cross-sectional shape of a part.

Furthermore, in the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-section of the branch protrusion when the branch protrusion is cut along a virtual vertical plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the branch protrusion. The shape may have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. Then, in the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the cross-sectional shape of the branch protrusion when the branch protrusion is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch protrusion May have a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion.

Furthermore, in the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above, the first electrode is formed with a slit or protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel. It can be set as a form. Note that no electrodes are formed on the slits or protrusions. In the 4B structure of the first electrode or the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode, the protrusion is made of, for example, a resist material. Alternatively, the first electrode may have a cross-shaped convex portion that passes through the center of the pixel and is surrounded by the concave portion. Such a cross-shaped convex part can be provided by forming a cross-shaped convex part on the lower side of the first electrode, or by a method similar to the method of forming the concave-convex part in the first electrode. It is also possible to provide it. Alternatively, instead of providing the slit portion or the protrusion (rib), a cross-shaped concave portion that passes through the pixel center portion may be provided. The same can be applied to the 4D-2 structure of the first electrode described later.

Furthermore, in the 4C structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above,
A convex structure is formed from a portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to a portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The peripheral part of the concavo-convex part may be formed on a convex structure. The convex structure may be formed based on a black matrix made of a known material. The same applies to the 4D structure of the first electrode including the various preferred embodiments described above.

Alternatively, in the fourth structure of the first electrode,
A convex structure is formed from a portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to a portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The peripheral part of the concavo-convex part may be formed on a convex structure. Such a form is referred to as a “fourth D structure of the first electrode” for convenience. In this way, when the peripheral portion of the uneven portion is formed on the convex structure, a stronger electric field is generated in the peripheral portion of the uneven portion than when the peripheral portion of the uneven portion is flat. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the peripheral part of the uneven part can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the peripheral part of the uneven part can be defined reliably. Therefore, good voltage response characteristics can be maintained.

Further, in the 4D structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion includes a trunk convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion. It can be set as a form. Such a form is referred to as a “fourth D-1 structure of the first electrode” for convenience. Note that the 4D-1 structure of the first electrode is substantially a combination of the 4A structure of the first electrode, the 4C structure of the first electrode, and the 4D structure of the first electrode.

Then, in the 4D-1 structure of the first electrode including the above-mentioned preferable form, it is possible to adopt a form in which an orientation regulating part is formed in the part of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex part. Here, the orientation restricting portion may be formed from a slit portion provided in the second electrode, or may be formed from a protrusion provided in the second electrode.

Alternatively, in the 4D structure of the first electrode, the concavo-convex portion is composed of a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel peripheral portion and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel. It can be set as a form. Such a form is referred to as a “fourth D-2 structure of the first electrode” for convenience. The 4D-2 structure of the first electrode is substantially a combination of the 4B structure of the first electrode, the 4C structure of the first electrode, and the 4D structure of the first electrode.

In the 4D-2 structure of the first electrode including the above-described preferable form, the first electrode is formed with a slit part or a protrusion part that passes through the center part of the pixel and is parallel to the peripheral part of the pixel. be able to.

In the fourth structure of the first electrode, the black matrix can be formed such that the projected image of the portion of the first substrate located between the pixels and the projected image of the black matrix overlap. The black matrix can be formed such that the projected image of the region extending from the first substrate portion located between the pixels to the end of the concavo-convex portion and the projected image of the black matrix overlap.

Examples of the average minimum width and average maximum width of the branch convex portions and the concave portions include 1 μm and 25 μm, preferably 2 μm and 20 μm. If the average minimum width of the branch convex portions and the concave portions is less than 1 μm, it is difficult to form the branch convex portions and the concave portions, and it may be impossible to secure a sufficient manufacturing yield. On the other hand, when the average maximum width of the branch convex portions and the concave portions exceeds 25 μm, a favorable oblique electric field is hardly generated between the first electrode and the second electrode when a driving voltage is applied to the first electrode and the second electrode. There is a risk of becoming. Examples of the width of the trunk convex portion include 2 × 10 ⁻⁶ m to 2 × 10 ⁻⁵ m, preferably 4 × 10 ⁻⁶ m to 1.5 × 10 ⁻⁵ m. The height from the concave portion to the convex portion closest to the concave portion is 5 × 10 ⁻⁸ m to 1 × 10 ⁻⁶ m, preferably 1 × 10 ⁻⁷ m to 1 × 10 ⁻⁶ m, more preferably 2 ×. 10 ^-7 m to be able to illustrate the 6 × 10 ^-7 m. The height of each step portion in the convex portion (the difference in height between the adjacent top surfaces of the convex portions constituting the step portion) is 5 × 10 ⁻⁸ m to 1 × 10 ⁻⁶ m, preferably 1 × 10 ^−7. m to 5 × 10 ⁻⁷ m can be exemplified. As a result, good orientation control can be achieved, a sufficient production yield can be secured, and a decrease in light transmittance and an extension of process time can be prevented. The above discussion can be applied to the 5A structure of the first electrode to the 5E structure of the first electrode by replacing “branch convex portion” with “branch convex portion etc.” to be described later.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode,
Assuming an X-axis and a Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can be configured to extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first electrode 5A structure” for convenience.

In the 5A structure of the first electrode, the plurality of protrusions occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases, and the plurality of protrusions occupying the second quadrant Are parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases, and the plurality of convex portions occupying the third quadrant are in the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases. The plurality of protrusions extending in parallel to the fourth quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases. In other words, the length of the convex portion extending parallel to the X axis, or the portion of the convex portion extending parallel to the Y axis does not exist, or even if it exists, the length is very short. Therefore, the alignment direction of the liquid crystal molecules can be matched as much as possible with the direction in which the convex portions extend, and the generation of dark lines in the region corresponding to the X axis and the Y axis can be suppressed. A liquid crystal display device capable of realizing the rate can be provided. In addition, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device having a configuration and a structure capable of giving a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules in a short time.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode, the second structure of the first electrode,
Assuming an X-axis and a Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are constituted by a trunk convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the trunk convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The extending direction of the side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion may be configured not to be parallel to the X axis and not parallel to the Y axis. That is, the extending direction of the side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is a direction different from the X axis and the Y axis. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first electrode 5B structure” for convenience.

In the 5B structure of the first electrode, the plurality of concavo-convex portions include a stem convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the stem convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel. The extending direction of the side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is not parallel to the X axis and not parallel to the Y axis. That is, there is no trunk convex portion extending in parallel with the X axis or the trunk convex portion extending in parallel with the Y axis. Therefore, the generation of dark lines in the region corresponding to the X axis and the Y axis can be suppressed, and as a result, a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance can be provided. In addition, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device having a configuration and a structure capable of giving a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules in a short time.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode and the second structure of the first electrode, the first electrode may further include a slit portion. That is, the first electrode is provided with a concavo-convex portion and a slit portion. In the slit portion, the transparent conductive material layer constituting the first electrode is not formed. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first electrode 5C structure” for convenience.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode and the second structure of the first electrode, the first electrode in the central region of the pixel may be provided with a depression. That is, the first electrode is provided with an uneven portion and a recess. A transparent conductive material layer constituting the first electrode is formed in the recess. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first electrode 5D structure” for convenience.

Alternatively, in the first structure of the first electrode and the second structure of the first electrode, assuming the X axis and the Y axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are constituted by a trunk convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the trunk convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. It can be set as a structure. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first electrode 5E structure” for convenience.

In the 5C structure of the first electrode, the first electrode has a slit portion in addition to the concavo-convex portion. Here, by providing the slit portion, the electric field generated by the first electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the slit portion, and the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules fall is strongly defined. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion can be reliably defined. In the 5D structure of the first electrode, the first electrode in the center region of the pixel is provided with a recess. Here, by providing the depression, the liquid crystal molecules located in the vicinity of the depression are in a state of falling toward the center of the pixel. Furthermore, in the 5E structure of the 1st electrode, it forms in the state which shifted | deviated from the convex part and the convex part. Here, by forming the convex portion and the convex portion in a shifted state, the electric field generated by the first electrode in the center of the pixel is distorted to a desired state in the vicinity of the center of the pixel, and the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules are tilted is changed. It is prescribed. As a result, it is possible to increase the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the center of the pixel, and to reliably define the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the center of the pixel. Thus, during the manufacture of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal layer is exposed to a desired electric field for a predetermined time in order to impart a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, but it is necessary for the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules exposed to the desired electric field to become stable. Time can be shortened. That is, a pretilt can be imparted to the liquid crystal molecules in a short time, and the manufacturing time of the liquid crystal display device can be shortened.

In the 5th A structure of the first electrode to the 5E structure of the 1st electrode, as described above, the convex portion or the branch convex portion (these may be collectively referred to as “branch convex portion” hereinafter). As described above, the arrangement state is called a multi-domain electrode structure, and regions having different extending directions such as branch protrusions are formed in one pixel, so that viewing angle characteristics can be improved. As described above, the plurality of branch projections occupying the first quadrant extend at an angle of 45 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of branch projections occupying the second quadrant A plurality of branch projections, etc., extending 135 degrees with the X axis and occupying the third quadrant, etc., a plurality of branch projections, etc., whose axis extending 225 degrees with the X axis, occupying the fourth quadrant, etc. Is preferably configured such that its axis extends 315 degrees with the X axis, but is not limited to these values (angles). Further, “when assuming the X axis and the Y axis passing through the center of the pixel” specifically means, for example, that each straight line passing through the center of the pixel and parallel to the peripheral portion of the pixel is the X axis and the Y axis. This means that an (X, Y) coordinate system is assumed. Except for the 5E structure of the first electrode, the branch convex portions and the like are preferably symmetrical with respect to the X axis and also symmetrical with respect to the Y axis, or alternatively, the 5A structure of the first electrode. In the 5E structure of the first electrode, it is preferable that the branch protrusions have a rotational symmetry (point symmetry) of 180 degrees with respect to the center of the pixel.

In the 5A structure of the first electrode, unlike the 5B structure of the first electrode, the trunk convex portion is not provided, and the convex portion in the 5A structure of the first electrode is substantially the first Corresponding to the branching protrusion in the electrode 5B structure
Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the first quadrant is joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant,
Each of the convex portions extending from the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant is joined to each of the convex portions extending from the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the second quadrant is joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the third quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant can be configured to be joined to each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant.

And in such a form in 5A structure of the 1st electrode, it is set as the structure by which the protrusion part extended toward the peripheral part direction of a pixel is provided in the junction part of two convex parts. it can. Here, the protruding portion can be configured to be surrounded by a plurality of line segments, can be configured to be surrounded by a single curve, or can be configured to be surrounded by a plurality of curves. It can also be set as the structure enclosed by the combination of a line segment and a curve. The tip of the protrusion may be in contact with a joint between two adjacent protrusions in the peripheral direction of the pixel. However, the liquid crystal display device having a long contact portion substantially corresponds to the 5B structure of the first electrode.

Alternatively, in the 5A structure of the first electrode,
Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant is not joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis or its vicinity and occupying the first quadrant is not joined to each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis or its vicinity and occupying the second quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant is not joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant can be configured not to be joined to each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant.

In the 5A structure of the first electrode including the preferable various forms and configurations described above, the width of the convex portion can be reduced toward the peripheral portion of the pixel.

Furthermore, in the 5A structure of the first electrode including the various preferred forms and configurations described above, the first electrode may be further formed with a slit portion. Such a form is referred to as a “first electrode 5A-1 structure” for convenience.

Here, in the 5A-1 structure of the first electrode, the slit portion may be formed in the concave region, but it is more preferable that the slit portion is formed in the convex region. In such a configuration, the slit portion may be provided in a convex region including the central region (central portion) of the pixel, or may be a convex extending toward the central region of the pixel. A configuration formed in a partial region, or a configuration formed in a convex region provided in a region sandwiched by a convex portion extending toward the central region of the pixel and the Y axis It can be. Examples of the width of the slit portion include 1 μm to 4 μm, preferably 2 μm to 3 μm. The same applies to the description of the slit portion below.

Alternatively, a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion can be formed on the top of the convex portion, and a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed on the bottom of the concave portion. It can also be. And in these cases, the slit part may be formed in all the convex parts, and the slit part may be formed in some convex parts. When forming a slit part in a part of convex part, it is desirable to form a slit part in the center area | region (center part) of a pixel, and the convex part of the vicinity. Moreover, the slit part may be formed in all the recessed parts, and the slit part may be formed in a part of recessed part. When forming a slit part in a part of recessed part, it is desirable to form a slit part in the center area | region (center part) of a pixel and the recessed part of the vicinity. Alternatively, a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion is formed at the top of the convex portion, and a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed at the bottom of the concave portion. In this case, the slit portion may be formed on all the convex portions, or the slit portion may be formed on a part of the convex portions. Moreover, the slit part may be formed in all the recessed parts, and the slit part may be formed in a part of recessed part. The first electrode is formed on the portion of the top surface of the convex portion where the slit portion is not provided, and the first electrode is formed on the portion of the concave portion where the slit portion is not provided. ing. In addition, although it is necessary to form a slit part so that the convex part isolated from another convex part may not be formed by a slit part, or so that a concave part isolated from another concave part may not be formed by a slit part, 1 In a so-called multi-pixel drive type display device in which one pixel is divided into a plurality of regions and each region is driven independently, a convex portion isolated from other convex portions by a slit portion in each region The slit portion may be formed so that a concave portion isolated from other concave portions is not formed by the slit portion. When providing the slit part on the top surface of the convex part, as the width of the convex part and the width of the slit part,
0.2 ≦ (width of slit portion / width of convex portion) ≦ 0.8
In the case of providing a slit portion on the bottom surface of the recess, as the width of the recess and the width of the slit portion,
0.2 ≦ (width of slit portion / width of recess) ≦ 0.8
Can be illustrated. The same applies to the description of the slit portion below.

Further, in the 5A-1 structure of the first electrode and the 5A structure of the first electrode including the various preferred forms and configurations described above, the first electrode in the central region of the pixel is provided with a recess. It can be set as a form. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 5A-2 structure” for convenience.

Here, in the 5A-2 structure of the first electrode, the recess may be narrowed toward the first substrate. That is, the depression can have a so-called forward tapered slope. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration having a vertical surface may be employed. In the configuration in which the depression is narrowed toward the first substrate, the inclination angle of the depression can be 5 to 60 degrees, preferably 20 to 30 degrees. Furthermore, in the 5A-2 structure of the first electrode including these preferred configurations, the shape of the outer edge of the recess can be circular or rectangular. In the latter case, the angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion (the angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the protruding portion where the outer edge and the extending portion of the convex portion intersect) 90 degrees or an acute angle. The shape of the outer edge of the depression is not limited to these, and any shape may be used as long as the liquid crystal molecules can be tilted toward the center of the pixel.

Furthermore, in the 5A-2 structure of the first electrode including the preferred configuration described above, the central portion of the recess can be configured to constitute a part of the contact hole.

It should be noted that the provisions relating to the 5A-2 structure of the first electrode described above can also be applied to the 5B-2 structure of the first electrode and the 5C-2 structure of the first electrode, which will be described later.

Further, in the 5A-1 structure of the first electrode including the 5A-1 structure of the first electrode, the 5A-2 structure of the first electrode, and the preferred various forms and configurations described above,
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state,
The convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state,
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state,
The convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant and the convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant may be formed so as to be shifted from each other. it can. Such a form is referred to as “first electrode 5A-3 structure” for convenience.

In addition, when the formation pitch of the projections along the X axis is P _X and the formation pitch of the projections along the Y axis is P _Y ,
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _X / 2). And
The convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2). And
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _X / 2). And
The convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant and the convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2). It is preferable to adopt a form. The same applies to the 5B-3 structure of the first electrode, the 5C-3 structure of the first electrode, and the 5D-3 structure of the first electrode, which will be described later.

Similarly, in the 5E structure of the first electrode, when the formation pitch of the branch protrusions along the X axis is P _X and the formation pitch of the branch protrusions along the Y axis is P _Y ,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are shifted by (P _X / 2) from each other. Formed in the state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are shifted by (P _Y / 2) from each other. Formed in the state,
The branch convex portion extending from the stem convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the stem convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are shifted by (P _X / 2) from each other. Formed in the state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2). It is preferable to have a form formed in a closed state.

In the 5B structure of the first electrode, the side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is linear and / or curved, that is, linear or curved. Or a combination of a straight line and a curved line.

And in 5B structure of the 1st electrode including such a desirable form, the width of the portion of the trunk convex part which is not joined to the branch convex part is narrowed toward the tip part of the trunk convex part, can do.

Furthermore, in the 5B structure of the first electrode including these preferable modes, the width of the branch convex portion can be narrowed toward the peripheral portion of the pixel.

Furthermore, in the 5B structure of the first electrode including the various preferred forms described above, the first electrode may be further formed with a slit portion. Such a form is referred to as a “first electrode 5B-1 structure” for convenience.

Here, in the 5B-1 structure of the first electrode, the slit portion may be formed in the concave region, but it is more preferable that the slit portion is formed in the convex region. In such a configuration, the slit portion may be provided in a convex region including the central region (central portion) of the pixel, or may be a convex extending toward the central region of the pixel. It can be configured to be formed in a partial region, or it is formed in a convex region provided in a region sandwiched between the branch convex portion extending toward the central region of the pixel and the Y axis. It can be configured. Alternatively, a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion can be formed on the top of the convex portion, and a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed on the bottom of the concave portion. It can also be. In addition, although it is necessary to form a slit part so that a convex part isolated from other convex parts may not be formed by the slit part, or so as not to form a concave part isolated from other concave parts by the slit part, In the multi-pixel driving display device, the slit portion may be formed as described above.

In the 5th B-1 structure of the 1st electrode and the 5th B structure of the 1st electrode including the various preferred forms and configurations described above, a form in which a depression is provided in the 1st electrode in the central region of the pixel It can be. Such a configuration is referred to as “first electrode 5B-2 structure” for convenience.

Further, in the 5B-1 structure of the first electrode including the 5B-1 structure of the first electrode, the 5B-2 structure of the first electrode, and the various preferred forms and configurations described above,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can be configured to extend in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases.

Further, in the 5B-1 structure of the first electrode including the 5B-1 structure of the first electrode, the 5B-2 structure of the first electrode, and the various preferred forms and configurations described above,
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. It can be set as a form. Such a configuration is referred to as a “first electrode 5B-3 structure” for convenience.

In the 5C structure of the first electrode, the slit portion may be formed in the concave region, but it is more preferable that the slit portion is formed in the convex region. And in such a form, the slit part can be made into the structure provided in the convex part area | region including the center area | region (center part) of a pixel, and the convex part extended toward the center area | region of a pixel It can be configured to be formed in the region, or it is configured to be formed in a convex region provided in a region sandwiched between the convex portion extending toward the central region of the pixel and the Y axis. be able to. Alternatively, a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion can be formed on the top of the convex portion, and a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed on the bottom of the concave portion. It can also be. In addition, although it is necessary to form a slit part so that a convex part isolated from other convex parts may not be formed by the slit part, or so as not to form a concave part isolated from other concave parts by the slit part, In the multi-pixel driving display device, the slit portion may be formed as described above.

Furthermore, in the 5C structure of the first electrode including the preferable modes and configurations described above, the width of the convex portion can be narrowed toward the peripheral portion of the pixel.

Furthermore, in the 5C structure of the first electrode including the preferable form and configuration described above, a form in which a depression is provided in the first electrode in the central region of the pixel can be adopted. Such a configuration is referred to as “first electrode 5C-2 structure” for convenience.

Further, in the 5C-2 structure of the first electrode including the 5C-2 structure of the first electrode and the various preferred forms and configurations described above,
Assuming an X-axis and a Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are configured by a stem convex portion extending on the X-axis and the Y-axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the stem convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel. Can do. And in this case
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant can be configured to extend in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases. And furthermore,
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. It can be set as a form. Such a configuration is referred to as “first electrode 5C-3 structure” for convenience.

In the 5D structure of the first electrode, the central portion of the recess may be a part of the contact hole. Here, the above-mentioned provision concerning the 5A-2 structure of the first electrode can be applied to the 5D structure of the first electrode.

Furthermore, in the 5D structure of the first electrode including the preferred embodiment described above, the above-mentioned definition of the 5C-3 structure of the first electrode can be applied. The fifth D-3 structure of

In the 5A structure of the first electrode to the 5E structure of the 1st electrode including the preferred modes and configurations described above, in the configuration in which the width of the branch convex portion or the like is narrowed toward the peripheral portion of the pixel, The width of the convex portion etc. is linearly narrower toward the periphery of the pixel (each side constituting the branch convex portion etc. is composed of one line segment, and the rate of change of the width is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape is narrowed in a curved shape (each side that constitutes a branch convex portion or the like is composed of one smooth curve, and the width changes. The rate can be changed), or each side constituting the branch convex portion or the like can be made up of two or more line segments or curves, or narrowed in a staircase shape. (A form in which each side of the branching convex portion is stepped)

In the 5A structure of the first electrode to the 5E structure of the 1st electrode including the preferred form and configuration described above, an orientation restricting portion is formed on the portion of the 2nd electrode facing the X axis and the Y axis. It can be set as a form. As described above, when the alignment restricting portion is formed in the portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion, the electric field generated by the second electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion, or the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion. The direction of falling is defined. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion can be reliably defined. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in image portions corresponding to the X axis and the Y axis. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

The orientation restricting portion can be formed of a second electrode slit portion provided on the second electrode, or alternatively, can be formed of a second electrode protrusion provided on the second electrode. Alternatively, it can also be constituted by a projecting second electrode portion. The second electrode protrusion is made of, for example, a resist material, and the second electrode is not formed thereon. In order to provide the protruding portion of the second electrode, a convex portion may be formed on the lower side of the second electrode, or, alternatively, by a method similar to the convex portion forming method of the concave and convex portions in the first electrode. It is also possible to provide a protruding portion of the second electrode.

Further, in the first electrode 5A structure to the first electrode 5E structure including the preferred form and configuration described above, a plurality of step portions are formed on the convex portion provided on the first electrode. It can be in the form. Here, the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion when the convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the direction in which the convex portion extends is such that the stepped portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion. It can be set as the form which has the cross-sectional shape which descends. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion when the convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the direction in which the convex portion extends is a stepped portion from the center of the convex sectional shape toward the end of the convex sectional shape. It can be set as the form which has the cross-sectional shape which falls. In this way, if a plurality of step portions (height difference) are formed on the convex portion, the electric field strength or weakness occurs in the convex portion, or a lateral electric field occurs. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules at the convex portions can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules at the convex portions can be reliably defined. Therefore, when displaying an image, for example, a dark line hardly occurs in an image portion corresponding to the convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

Further, as described above, in the 4A structure of the first electrode or the 4B structure of the first electrode and the 5A structure of the first electrode to the 5E structure of the first electrode, including the preferred embodiment and configuration described above, The width of the convex portion or the like is the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion, or the portion such as the X-axis or the vicinity thereof, the Y-axis or the vicinity of the branch convex portion (for convenience, “the root of the branch convex portion etc. It is possible to adopt a form in which the area is called the “part” ”is widest and narrows toward the peripheral part of the pixel, that is, toward the tip part such as a branch convex part. Here, it is assumed that the formation pitch of the branch convex portions is “P”, the width of the root portion of the branch convex portions is “W ₁ ”, and the width of the tip portion of the branch convex portions is “W ₂ ”. As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, an angle formed by the edge of the trunk convex portion where the trunk convex portion and the branch convex portion are joined, and one edge portion (side edge portion) of the branch convex portion (or alternatively, The angle between the X-axis or Y-axis and one edge part (side edge part) of the branch convex part is α ₁ , the outer edge of the trunk convex part where the trunk convex part and the branch convex part are joined, and the branch convex part other angle between the side edge portion (Alternatively, the X-axis or Y-axis, the angle formed by the other side edge portion such Edatotsu portion) when formed into a ₂ alpha, near the outer edge of Mikitotsu portion The angle formed between the axis L ₀ of the branch convex portion and the outer edge of the trunk convex portion (or the angle formed between the X axis or the Y axis and the axis L ₀ of the branch convex portion) α ₀ is
α ₀ = {α ₁ + (180−α ₂ )} / 2
It can be expressed as However, 0 <α ₁ ≦ 90 degrees and 90 ≦ α ₂ <180 degrees. In such a case, the intersection of the outer edge of the trunk convex part and one side edge part of the branch convex part (or the intersection of one side edge part such as the X axis or Y axis and the branch convex part). Let w ₁₁ be the intersection of the X-axis or Y-axis and the other side edge portion such as the branch convex portion, and let w ′ ₁₁ be the straight line L ₁ passing through the intersection w ₁₁ and orthogonal to the axis L ₀ of the branch convex portion. when the point of intersection with the other side edge portion of the Edatotsu portion such was w _12, the distance from the intersection w ₁₁ to the intersection w _12, defined as the width W ₁ of the root portion of such Edatotsu portion. In addition, a straight line orthogonal to the axis L ₀ of the branch convex portion or the like, and an intersection (or branch convex) of a straight line L _{2 in} contact with the tip portion such as the branch convex portion and one side edge portion such as the branch convex portion. The intersection of one side edge portion extension line such as a portion) with w ₂₁ , the straight line L ₂ and the other side edge portion such as a branch convex portion (or the other side edge such as a branch convex portion) when an intersection) between parts extension was w _22, the distance from the intersection w ₂₁ to the intersection w _22, to define the width of the tip portion of such Edatotsu section and W _2. In FIG. 98, the side edge portion extension line is indicated by a one-dot chain line. Furthermore, the distance between the axis lines L ₀ of the adjacent branch convex portions or the like is defined as the formation pitch P of the branch convex portions or the like. In addition, a straight line L ₃ passing through the intersection point w ′ ₁₁ and parallel to the straight line L ₁ is opposed to (adjacent to) the other side edge part such as the branch convex part, and the one side edge part such as the branch convex part. Assuming that the intersecting point is w ₃₁ , the distance from the intersecting point w ′ ₁₁ to the intersecting point w ₃₁ is defined as the distance W ₃ between the branch convex portions and the like. The total taper width TP of the branch convex part etc. is
TP = W ₁ -W ₂
Can be defined as Also, the average width W _ave1 such Edatotsu portion, the average width W _ave2 recess,
W _ave1 = (W ₁ + W ₂ ) / 2
W _ave2 = P-W _ave1
It can be expressed as Here, the value of W ₃ can be 1 μm to 10 μm, preferably 2 μm to 5 μm, and the value of W ₂ can be 1 μm to 10 μm, preferably 2 μm to 5 μm. 2 μm to 20 μm, preferably 2 μm to 10 μm. Further, examples of the value of TP include 0.1 to 10 times W ₃ . In addition, what is necessary is just to apply these values with respect to the longest branch convex part.

In the following, an embodiment in which a planarizing layer is formed will be described. However, if the planarizing layer is not formed, the first structure of the first electrode or the various first structures of the first electrode may be modified. Needless to say. The relationship between the examples described below and the structure of the first electrode is as follows.

1. Example 2A-1 (second structure of first electrode / first electrode of first type)
2. Example 2A-2 (second structure of first electrode / first electrode of second type)
3. Example 2A-3 (second structure of first electrode / first electrode of third type)
4). Example 2A-4 (Modification of Examples 2A-1 to 2A-3 / Second Structure of First Electrode / Second Structure of First Electrode 2-3)
5. Example 2B-1 (3A-1 structure of the first electrode)
6). Example 2B-2 (Modification of Example 2B-1)
7). Example 2B-3 (another modification of Example 2B-1)
8). Example 2B-4 (3A-2 structure of the first electrode)
9. Example 2B-5 (Modification of Example 2B-4)
10. Example 2B-6 (Modification of Example 2B-5)
11. Example 2B-7 (3B-1 structure of first electrode including Example 2B-1 to Example 2B-6)
12 Example 2B-8 (first electrode 3C structure / first electrode second structure, first electrode 3A-1 structure, first electrode 3B-1 structure modification)
13. Example 2B-9 (3D structure of first electrode / 2-2 structure of first electrode, 3A-2 structure of first electrode, 3B-2 structure of first electrode)
14 Example 2C-1 (first electrode 4A structure)
15. Example 2C-2 (first electrode 4B structure)
16. Example 2C-3 (4C-1 structure of first electrode)
17. Example 2C-4 (Modification of Example 2C-3)
18. Example 2C-5 (another modification of Example 2C-3)
19. Example 2C-6 (another modification of Example 2C-3, 4C-2 structure of the first electrode)
20. Example 2C-7 (Modification of Example 2C-6)
21. Example 2C-8 (Modification of Example 2C-7)
22. Example 2D-1 (first electrode 5A structure)
23. Example 2D-2 (Modification of Example 2D-1)
24. Example 2D-3 (another modification of Example 2D-1)
25. Example 2D-4 (Modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-3)
26. Example 2D-5 (Modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-4 / Fifth A-1 Structure of First Electrode / Fifth C Structure of First Electrode)
27. Example 2D-6 (Modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-5 / Fifth D Structure of First Electrode / Fifth A-2 Structure of First Electrode / Fifth C-2 Structure of First Electrode)
28. Example 2D-7 (Modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-6 / First Electrode 5E Structure / First Electrode 5A-3 Structure / First Electrode 5C-3 Structure / First (5D-3 structure of electrode)
29. Example 2D-8 (first electrode 5B structure / first electrode 5C structure / first electrode 5D structure / first electrode 5B-1 structure / first electrode 5B-2 structure / (5C-2 structure of first electrode / 5E structure of first electrode / 5B-3 structure of first electrode / 5C-3 structure of first electrode / 5D-3 structure of first electrode)
30. Example 2D-9 (another variation of Example 2D-8)
31. Example 2D-10 (Modification of Example 2D-9)
32. Example 2D-11 (another modification of Example 2D-9)
33. Example 2D-12 (5th E structure of the first electrode)

<Example 2A-1>
Example 2A-1 relates to the second structure of the first electrode, specifically to the 2-1 structure of the first electrode, and further to the first electrode of the first type. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device in Example 2A-1 is shown in FIG. 16, and a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device in Example 2A-1 is shown. 19A and 20B are schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like taken along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 19 in the liquid crystal display device in Example 2A-1 shown in FIG.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1 or the liquid crystal display devices of Example 2A-2 to Example 2D-12, which will be described later, the first electrode has a plurality of concave and convex portions. The flattened layers 41, 42, and 43 are buried between at least the recesses of one electrode.

Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, the planarization layer 41 covers the first electrode 140. The first alignment film 21 that covers the planarization layer 41 and the second alignment film 51 that covers the second electrode 160 are further provided, and at least the first alignment film 21 imparts a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules. The planarization layer 41 is made of a resist material, and the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51 are made of the materials described in the first to third embodiments and the first embodiment. The same applies to the following embodiments. The planarizing layer 41, the first alignment film 21, and the second alignment film 51 can be formed based on, for example, a spin coating method.

A TFT layer 30 (details will be described later) is formed on the first substrate 20, and a smoothing film 22 made of an organic insulating material such as photosensitive polyimide resin or acrylic resin is formed on the TFT layer 30. The first electrode 140 is formed on the smoothing film 22. The smoothing film 22 can also be composed of an inorganic insulating material such as SiO ₂ , SiN, or SiON. The same applies to various embodiments described below.

Reference numerals

146, 246, 346, 1146, 1246, 2146, 2246, 2345, 2446, 3146, 3246, 3346, 3446 indicate portions of the first substrate located between the pixels.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, the first electrode 140 has a plurality of concave and convex portions 141 (the convex portions 142 and the concave portions 145). Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, the uneven portion 141 includes a trunk convex portion (main convex portion) 143 extending through the center of the pixel and extending in a cross shape, and the peripheral portion of the pixel from the trunk convex portion 143. It is comprised from the several branch convex part (subconvex part) 144 extended toward. More specifically, when assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system in which each of the trunk convex portions 143 extending in a crossed shape is an X axis and a Y axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions 144 occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 144 occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 144 occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 144 occupying the fourth quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. In the drawing, the concave portion 145 is hatched extending in the vertical direction.

The uneven part is, for example,
(A) Formation of a resist material layer on the underlying smoothing film (or color filter layer) (the smoothing film and the color filter layer are collectively referred to as “smoothing film, etc.”)
(B) Formation of irregularities in resist material layer by exposure / development (c) Formation of irregularities in smoothing film, etc. by etch back of resist material layer and smoothing film, etc. (d) On smoothing film, etc. It can be obtained by forming and patterning a transparent conductive material layer.

Alternatively, the uneven portion is, for example,
(A) Formation of a resist material layer on an underlayer formed on a smoothing film, etc. (b) Formation of irregularities in the resist material layer by exposure and development (c) Resist material layer, smoothing film, etc. Formation of concavo-convex portions in the underlayer by etch back (d) It can be obtained by forming and patterning a transparent conductive material layer on the underlayer.

Alternatively, the uneven portion is, for example,
(A) Formation of patterned insulating material layer on a smoothing film or the like as a base (b) Formation and patterning of a transparent conductive material layer on a smoothing film or the like and an insulating material layer.

Alternatively, the uneven portion is, for example,
(A) Formation of a transparent conductive material layer on a smoothing film or the like as a base (b) Formation of a resist material layer on the transparent conductive material layer (c) Formation of uneven portions in a resist material layer by exposure and development (d) Resist It can be obtained by etching back the material layer and the transparent conductive material layer.

Alternatively, the uneven portion is, for example,
(A) Formation and patterning of a first transparent conductive material layer on a smoothing film or the like as a base (b) a second transparent conductive material having an etching selectivity with the first transparent conductive material layer on the first transparent conductive material layer It can be obtained by layer formation and patterning.

Alternatively, the concavo-convex portion can be formed by, for example, optimizing the thickness of the smoothing film, so that liquid crystal display device components (for example, various signals) formed on the first substrate or above the first substrate can be used. It can also be obtained by forming a convex portion on the smoothing film due to the influence of the thickness of the line, auxiliary capacitance electrode, gate electrode, source / drain electrode, and various wirings.

The side surface (side wall) of the convex portion, the trunk convex portion, or the branch convex portion may be a vertical surface, may have a forward taper, or may have a reverse taper.

The above description regarding the concavo-convex portion can be applied to various embodiments described below. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a stepped portion in a trunk convex portion or a branch convex portion described later.

In the manufacture of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, first, a TFT is formed based on the method described below, and ITO is formed on the opposing surface of the first substrate 20 on which the smoothing film 22 is formed. A transparent conductive material layer is formed. The first substrate 20 is made of a glass substrate having a thickness of 0.7 mm.

That is, as shown in FIG. 96A, the gate electrode 31 is formed on the insulating film 20 ′ formed on the first substrate 20, and the gate insulating layer 32 is formed on the gate electrode 31 and the insulating film 20 ′. . The gate insulating layer 32 is, for example, made of SiO ₂ or SiN, SiON, metal oxides. Next, after forming a semiconductor layer 33 to be a channel formation region on the gate insulating layer 32, a source / drain electrode 34 is formed on the semiconductor layer 33. The semiconductor layer 33 is made of, for example, polysilicon or amorphous silicon, and the source / drain electrode 34 is made of, for example, a metal film such as titanium, chromium, aluminum, molybdenum, tantalum, tungsten, or copper, or an alloy film or a laminated film thereof. Consists of. In this way, the TFT layer 30 can be obtained. The above TFT layer 30 can be formed based on a known method. The TFT is not limited to such a so-called bottom gate / top contact type, and may be a bottom gate / bottom contact type, a top gate / top contact type, or a top gate / bottom contact type. It can also be a contact type. Next, after a smoothing film 22 having a thickness of 2.5 μm is formed on the entire surface, a connection hole 35 is formed in the smoothing film 22 above one source / drain electrode 34.

Next, after forming a resist material layer on the smoothing film 22, exposure / development is performed to form an uneven portion having a predetermined depth in the resist material layer. Then, by performing the etch back of the resist material layer and the smoothing film 22, the uneven portion can be formed in the smoothing film 22. After that, by forming a transparent conductive material layer 24 made of ITO having a predetermined thickness on the entire surface, the concave and convex portions 141 (the

convex portions

143 and 144 and the concave portion 145) can be obtained. And the 1st electrode 140 can be provided in a matrix form by patterning the transparent conductive material layer 24 based on a well-known method. The specifications of the

convex portions

143 and 144 and the concave portion 145 are as shown in Table 3 below.

A transparent conductive material for forming the first electrode 140 on the smoothing film 22 including the connection hole 35 after the connection hole 35 is formed in the smoothing film 22 above the one source / drain electrode 34. A layer may be deposited. Then, in this case, after forming a resist material layer on the transparent conductive material layer, exposure / development is performed to form an uneven portion in the resist material layer. Then, by performing etch back of the resist material layer and the transparent conductive material layer, the uneven portion 141 (the

protruded portions

143 and 144 and the recessed portion 145) can be formed.

On the other hand, in the second substrate 50, a color filter layer (not shown) is formed on the second substrate 50 made of a glass substrate having a thickness of 0.7 mm, and a so-called solid electrode second is formed on the color filter layer. An electrode 160 is formed.

[Table 3]
Average height of protrusions: 0.4 μm
Convex part formation pitch: 5.0 μm
Width of convex part: 2.5 μm
Recess width: 2.5 μm
Transparent conductive material layer thickness: 0.1 μm
Inclination angle of side surface of branch convex portion: forward taper and 70 degrees average film thickness of first alignment film: 0.1 μm
Average film thickness of second alignment film: 0.1 μm
T ₂ / T ₁ : 1
H _L / H _H : about 1
H _H / H _C : about 1.25

Next, a planarization layer 41 that covers the first electrode 140 is formed based on a spin coating method and dried. Next, the first alignment film 21 is formed on the planarization layer 41, and the second alignment film 51 is formed on the second electrode 160. Specifically, after the alignment film material is applied or printed on each of the planarization layer 41 and the second electrode 160, heat treatment is performed. Thereafter, a liquid crystal display device is assembled in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Next, the

alignment films

21 and 51 are irradiated with energy rays (specifically ultraviolet rays UV) while applying a voltage between the first electrode 140 and the second electrode 160 using a voltage applying unit. A liquid crystal display device can be completed.

Through the above steps, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) shown in FIG. 16 in which the liquid crystal molecules 71A on the first substrate side form a pretilt can be completed. Finally, a pair of polarizing plates (not shown) are attached to the outside of the liquid crystal display device so that the absorption axes are orthogonal. In addition, the liquid crystal display device in the various Example described below can also be manufactured by the substantially same method.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, the planarizing layer fills at least the space between the recesses of the first electrode. That is, the portion (specifically, the first alignment film) where the liquid crystal molecules are in contact with the first electrode side is flat or substantially flat. Therefore, the alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules can be made uniform, and as a result, the light transmittance of the liquid crystal display device can be made uniform. Further, sufficient black display quality can be realized, and good contrast characteristics can be realized. Furthermore, the inclination of the side surface (side wall) of the concavo-convex portion can be made gentle, and for example, it is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of problems such as the occurrence of disconnection at the convex edge portion of the transparent conductive material layer constituting the concavo-convex portion. In addition, as a result of adopting a process having a relatively loose margin, it is possible to improve the manufacturing yield of the liquid crystal display device.

A color filter layer may be formed on the first substrate 20. Specifically, as described above, after forming the TFT layer 30 on the first substrate 20, the color filter layer 23 is formed on the TFT layer 30 instead of the smoothing film 22 based on a known method. In this way, a COA (Color Filter On Array) structure can be obtained. Then, after forming the connection hole 35 in the color filter layer 23 above the one source / drain electrode 34, the transparent conductive material layer 24 for providing the first electrode 140 on the color filter layer 23 including the connection hole 35. May be formed (see FIG. 96B).

Except for the formation of the planarizing layer 41, the first structure of the first electrode, more specifically, the 1-1 structure of the first electrode can be obtained.

<Example 2A-2>
Example 2A-2 is a modification of Example 2A-1, and specifically relates to a second electrode of the second type. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-2 is shown in FIG. 17, and the first view along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 20C and 20D show schematic partial cross-sectional views of electrodes and the like. Incidentally, a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-2 or Example 2A-3 described later is the same as that shown in FIG.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-2,
The planarization layer 42 covers the first electrode 140,
A first alignment film covering the first electrode 140 and a second alignment film 51 covering the second electrode 160;
The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by at least the first alignment film,
The first alignment film corresponds to the planarization layer 42.

The specifications of the

convex portions

143 and 144, the concave portion 145 and the like were the same as those in Table 3 described above. The values such as T ₂ / T ₁ are shown in Table 4 below. As the material constituting the planarizing layer 42 that also functions as the first alignment film, the same material as the alignment film material in Example 2A-1 was used.

[Table 4]
Average film thickness of first alignment film: 0.3 μm
Average film thickness of second alignment film: 0.3 μm
T ₂ / T ₁ : 1
H _L / H _H : about 1
H _H / H _C : about 1.25

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-2 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 2A-3>
Example 2A-3 is a modification of Example 2A-1, and specifically relates to a first electrode of the third type. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-3 is shown in FIG. 18, and the first direction along arrows AA and BB of FIG. 19 in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-3 is shown. Schematic partial cross-sectional views of electrodes and the like are shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-3,
The planarization layer 43 fills between the

recesses

145 and 145 of the first electrode 140,
A first alignment film 21 covering the first electrode 140 and the planarizing layer 43 and a second alignment film 51 covering the second electrode 160;
A pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules by at least the first alignment film 21.

The planarizing layer 43 is made of a resist material, and the same material as the alignment film material in Example 2A-1 was used as the first alignment film 21 and the second alignment film 51. The planarization layer 43 can be formed by forming a resist material layer on the concavo-convex portion 141 of the first electrode 140 and etching back the resist material layer. Alternatively, although depending on the resist material, the resist material layer can be formed by exposing and developing using an exposure mask that covers the space between the

recesses

145 and 145, or the exposure mask that covers the protrusions. It can be formed by exposing and developing the resist material layer using, or by so-called back exposure. Then, based on the etch-back method, the gap between the concave portion 145 and the concave portion 145 of the first electrode 140 can be filled with the alignment film material. The specifications of the

convex portions

143 and 144, the concave portion 145 and the like were the same as those in Table 3 described above. The values of T ₂ / T ₁ etc. in Example 2A-3-A and Example 2A-3-B are shown in Table 5 below.

[Table 5]
Example 2A-3-A
Average film thickness of the first alignment film: 0.25 μm
Average film thickness of second alignment film: 0.2 μm
T ₂ / T ₁ : 0.8
H _L / H _H : about 0.8
H _H / H _C : about 1.25
Example 2A-3-B
Average film thickness of the first alignment film: 0.2 μm
Average film thickness of second alignment film: 0.2 μm
T ₂ / T ₁ : 1
H _L / H _H : about 0.6
H _H / H _C : about 1.25

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-3 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 2A-4>
Example 2A-4 is a modification of Example 2A-1 to Example 2A-3, but relates to the 2-2 structure of the first electrode. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4 is shown in FIG. 22, and the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B are schematic partial end views of FIG.

Also in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4, the first electrode 240 has a plurality of concave and convex portions 241 (the convex portions 242 and the concave portions 245). Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4, the concavo-convex portion 241 includes a stem convex portion (main convex portion) 243 formed in a frame shape around the pixel, and the stem convex portion 243 to the inside of the pixel. It is comprised from the some branch convex part (sub convex part) 244 extended toward. In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4, assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system in which the straight lines passing through the center of the pixel and parallel to the periphery of the pixel are the X axis and the Y axis, respectively. ,
The plurality of branch convex portions 244 occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 244 occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
A plurality of branch convex portions 244 occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 244 occupying the fourth quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. The shape of the concave portion located at the center of the pixel is generally cross-shaped.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display devices of Example 2A-1 to Example 2A-3. The detailed explanation is omitted.

Note that the 2-1 structure of the first electrode (the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1 to Example 2A-3) and the 2-2 structure of the first electrode (the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-4). (A liquid crystal display device according to the 2-3 form of the present disclosure) That is, as shown in a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel in FIG. The portion 341 passes through the center of the pixel and joins the trunk convex portion 343A extending in a cross shape, the plurality of branch convex portions 344 extending from the trunk convex portion 343A toward the pixel peripheral portion, and the plurality of branch convex portions 344, It is comprised from the trunk convex part 343B formed in the frame shape at the periphery part.The trunk convex part 343A, the branch convex part 344, and the several branch convex part 344 whole are the convex parts 342. Here, it is. Even in such a liquid crystal display device, each of the trunk convex portions 343A extending in a cross shape is used. X-axis, and the Y-axis (X, Y) when assuming a coordinate system,
The plurality of branch convex portions 344 occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 344 occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 344 occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 344 occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. Reference numeral 345 indicates a recess.

<Example 2B-1>
Example 2B-1 relates to the 3A structure of the first electrode, specifically, the 3A-1 structure of the first electrode. FIG. 25 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, and FIGS. 26A, 26B, and 26C show arrows AA, FIG. A schematic partial sectional view of the first electrode and the like along arrows BB and CC is shown, and FIG. 26D shows a schematic partial sectional view in which a part of FIG. 26C is enlarged. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1 is substantially the same as FIGS.

In the schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like described below, the planarization layers 41, 42, and 43 and the first alignment film 21 are not shown. Further, compared to Example 2B-1 or Example 2B-2 and subsequent examples, the planarization layer 41 and the first alignment film 21 of Example 2A-1, the planarization layer 42 of Example 2A-2, or The planarizing layer 43 and the first alignment film 21 of Example 2A-3 are applied.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, the first electrode 1140 is formed with a plurality of concave and convex portions 1141 (the convex portions 1142 and the concave portions 1145), and the convex portions provided on the first electrode 1140 are provided. The step 1142 has a plurality of step portions.

Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, the concavo-convex portion 1141 passes through the center portion of the pixel and extends to the cross section of the main convex portion (main convex portion) 1143, and from the main portion 143 to the peripheral portion of the pixel. It is comprised from the several branch convex part (subconvex part) 1144 extended toward. More specifically, when assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system in which each of the trunk convex portions 1143 extending in a crossed shape is an X axis and a Y axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions 1144 occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 1144 occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 1144 occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 1144 occupying the fourth quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.

In addition, the step part in the trunk convex part 1143 or the branch convex part 1144 mentioned later, the trunk convex part 3343, and the branch convex part 33144 is, for example,
(A) Formation and patterning of the first transparent

conductive material layers

1140A and 3340A on the smoothing film 22 as a base (b) etching with the first transparent

conductive material layers

1140A and 3340A on the first transparent

conductive material layers

1140A and 3340A Although it can obtain by formation and patterning of the 2nd transparent

conductive material layers

1140B and 3340B which have a selection ratio, it is not limited to this.

The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 1143 when the stem convex portion 1143 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 1143 is the cross-section of the stem convex portion 1143 from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 1143. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the edge of the shape. Specifically, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 1143 includes a top surface 1143B at the center of the trunk convex portion 1143 and top surfaces 1143A located on both sides of the top surface 1143B. Thus, the trunk convex portion 1143 has two stepped portions, and the top surface 1143A and the top surface 1143B become higher in this order when the concave portion 1145 is used as a reference. Although the top surface of the branch convex portion 1144 is indicated by reference numeral 1144A, the top surface 1143A of the trunk convex portion 1143 and the top surface 1144A of the branch convex portion 1144 are at the same level. In the drawing, the top surface 1143B of the trunk convex portion 1143 is hatched extending in the horizontal direction, and the concave portion 1145 is hatched extending in the vertical direction. The specifications of the trunk convex portion 1143, the branch convex portion 1144, and the concave portion 1145 are as shown in Table 6 below.

[Table 6]
Height difference between the top surface 1143A of the trunk convex portion 1143 and the concave portion 1145: average 0.20 μm
Height difference between the top surface 1144A of the branch convex portion 1144 and the concave portion 1145: average 0.20 μm
Width of trunk convex portion 1143 (width of top surface 1143A of trunk convex portion 1143): 8.0 μm
Width of top surface 1143B of trunk convex portion 1143: 4.0 μm
Width of branch convex portion 1144 (width of top surface 1144A of branch convex portion 1144): 2.5 μm
Interval (space) between the branch convex portion 1144 and the branch convex portion 1144: 2.5 μm
Difference in height between the top surface 1143B and the top surface 1143A of the trunk convex portion 1143: average 0.2 μm

When no step portion is formed on the stem convex portion, the behavior of liquid crystal molecules is weak as shown in the conceptual diagram of FIG. 27A, and the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules at the central portion of the stem convex portion is weak, and the central portion of the stem convex portion In some cases, the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in is not determined. On the other hand, in Example 2B-1, a plurality of stepped portions are formed in the trunk convex portion 1143 as described above, that is, a plurality of

top surfaces

1143A and 1143B are formed in the trunk convex portion 1143. Therefore, the electric field is highest at the central portion of the trunk convex portion 1143, and the electric field decreases toward the edge of the trunk convex portion 1143. Therefore, as shown in the conceptual diagram of FIG. 27B, the behavior of the liquid crystal molecules can increase the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the central portion of the stem convex portion 1143, and the liquid crystal molecules in the central portion of the stem convex portion 1143 can be strengthened. The tilt state can be defined reliably. Therefore, at the time of image display, it is difficult for dark lines to occur in the image portion corresponding to the central portion of the trunk convex portion 1143. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

<Example 2B-2>
Example 2B-2 is a modification of Example 2B-1. FIG. 28 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-2. FIGS. 30A and 30B show arrows AA and B- in FIG. A typical partial sectional view of the 1st electrode etc. along B is shown.

In Example 2B-2, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 1143 is located on the top surface 1143C at the center of the trunk convex portion 1143, the top surface 1143B located on both sides of the top surface 1143C, and the outside of the top surface 1143B. It consists of a top surface 1143A. Thus, the trunk convex portion 1143 has three stepped portions, and the top surface 1143A, the top surface 1143B, and the top surface 1143C become higher in this order when the concave portion 1145 is used as a reference. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 1143 when the stem convex portion 1143 is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 1143 is from the central portion (top surface 1143C) of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 1143. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the trunk convex portion 1143 (top surface 1143B and top surface 1143A). In the drawing, the top surface 1143C is cross-hatched. The height difference between the top surface 1143C and the top surface 1143B of the trunk convex portion 1143 and the height difference between the top surface 1143B and the top surface 1143A were set to 0.20 μm on average. Other specifications of the trunk convex portion 1143, the branch convex portion 1144, and the concave portion 1145 are the same as those in Table 6.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-2 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Example 2B-3>
Example 2B-3 is also a modification of Example 2B-1. FIG. 29 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-3. FIG. 30C shows the first electrode and the like along the arrow CC in FIG. FIG. 30D shows a schematic partial end view of FIG. 30C and an enlarged partial partial end view of FIG. 30C.

In Example 2B-3, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1144 when the branch convex portion 1144 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion 1144 is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1144. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the step portion descends from the center toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1144. Specifically, the top surface of the branch convex portion 1144 includes a top surface 1144B extending from the trunk convex portion 1143 and top surfaces 1144A located on both sides of the top surface 1144B. Thus, there are two stepped portions in the branch convex portion 1144, and when the concave portion 1145 is used as a reference, the top surface 1144A and the top surface 1144B become higher in this order. In the drawing, the top surface 1144B is hatched in the lateral direction. 29, 31 and 37, the boundary between the trunk convex portion and the branch convex portion is indicated by a solid line. The height difference between the top surface 1143B and the top surface 1143A of the branch convex portion 1144 was set to 0.20 μm on average. Other specifications of the trunk convex portion 1143, the branch convex portion 1144, and the concave portion 1145 are the same as those in Table 6. The top surface 1143B of the trunk convex portion 1143 and the top surface 1144B of the branch convex portion 1144 are at the same level.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-3 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31, a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device, the branch protrusion 1144 is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch protrusion 1144. The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1144 is such that the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1144 toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1144. You can also Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a schematic perspective view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device can be combined with the trunk convex portion 1143 described in Example 2B-2.

<Example 2B-4>
Example 2B-4 is also a modification of Example 2B-1, but relates to the 3A-2 structure of the first electrode. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4 is shown in FIG. 33, a schematic perspective view is shown in FIG. 34, and arrows AA and FIG. A schematic partial end view of the first electrode or the like along the arrow BB is shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, and a schematic partial end view enlarging a part of FIG. 36B is shown in FIG. 36C.

Also in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4, the first electrode 1240 has a plurality of concave and convex portions 1241 (the convex portion 1242 and the concave portion 1245), and the convex portion 1242 provided on the first electrode 1240 has A plurality of step portions are formed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4, the concavo-convex portion 1241 includes a stem convex portion (main convex portion) 1243 formed in a frame shape at the periphery of the pixel, and the stem convex portion 1243 to the inside of the pixel. It is comprised from the several branch convex part (subconvex part) 1244 extended toward. In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4, assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system in which straight lines passing through the center of the pixel and parallel to the periphery of the pixel are the X axis and the Y axis, respectively. ,
The plurality of branch convex portions 1244 occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
A plurality of branch convex portions 1244 occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
A plurality of branch convex portions 1244 occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 1244 occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.

The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 1243 when the stem convex portion 1243 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 1243 is the stem convex portion 1243 from the outer edge of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 1243. The cross-sectional shape is such that the stepped portion descends toward the inner edge of the cross-sectional shape. Specifically, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 1243 includes a top surface 1243B near the outer edge of the trunk convex portion 1243 and a top surface 1243A near the inner edge. Thus, the trunk convex portion 1243 has two stepped portions, and the top surface 1243A and the top surface 1243B become higher in this order when the concave portion 1245 is used as a reference. The top surface of the branch convex portion 1244 is indicated by reference numeral 1244A, but the top surface 1243A of the trunk convex portion 1243 and the top surface 1244A of the branch convex portion 1244 are at the same level. In the drawing, the top surface 1243B of the trunk convex portion 1243 is provided with hatching extending in the horizontal direction, and the concave portion 1245 is provided with hatching extending in the vertical direction. The shape of the concave portion located at the center of the pixel is generally cross-shaped. The specifications of the trunk convex portion 1243, the branch convex portion 1244, and the concave portion 1245 are as shown in Table 7 below.

[Table 7]
Height difference between the top surface 1243B and the top surface 1243A of the trunk convex portion 1243: 0.20 μm on average
Height difference between the top surface 1243A of the trunk convex portion 1243 and the concave portion 1245: average 0.20 μm
Height difference between the top surface 1244A of the branch convex portion 1244 and the concave portion 1245: average 0.20 μm
Width of trunk convex portion 1243 (width of top surface 1243A of trunk convex portion 1243): 8.0 μm
Width of top surface 1243B of trunk convex portion 1243: 4.0 μm
Width of branch convex portion 1244 (width of top surface 1244A of branch convex portion 1244): 2.5 μm
Interval (space) between the branch convex portion 1244 and the branch convex portion 1244: 2.5 μm
Width of cross-shaped recess provided in the center of the pixel: 4.0 μm

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-1, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In Example 2B-4, since the plurality of step portions are formed on the stem convex portion 1243, the electric field is highest at the outer edge of the stem convex portion 1243, and the inner edge of the stem convex portion 1243 The electric field decreases toward. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the trunk convex portion 1243 can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the trunk convex portion 1243 can be reliably defined. Therefore, when displaying an image, it is difficult for a dark line to be generated in an image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion 1243. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

<Example 2B-5>
Example 2B-5 is a modification of Example 2B-4. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-5 is shown in FIG. 35, and a schematic enlarged view of the first electrode along arrow DD in FIG. 35 is shown. A partial end view is shown in FIG. 36D.

In Example 2B-5, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 1243 includes a top surface 1243C in the vicinity of the outer edge portion of the trunk convex portion 1243, and a top surface 1243B and a top surface 1243A toward the inner edge portion. Has been. Thus, the trunk convex portion 1243 has three step portions, and the top surface 1243A, the top surface 1243B, and the top surface 1243C become higher in this order when the concave portion 1245 is used as a reference. In the drawing, the top surface 1243C is cross-hatched. The height difference between the top surface 1243C and the top surface 1243B of the trunk convex portion 1243 and the height difference between the top surface 1243B and the top surface 1243A were set to 0.20 μm on average. Other specifications of the trunk convex portion 1243, the branch convex portion 1244, and the concave portion 1245 are the same as those in Table 7.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-5 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 2B-6>
Example 2B-6 is a modification of Example 2B-5. FIG. 37 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-6.

In Example 2B-6, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1244 when the branch convex portion 1244 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion 1244 is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1244. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1244. Specifically, the top surface of the branch convex portion 1244 includes a top surface 1244B extending from the top surface 1243B of the trunk convex portion 1243 and top surfaces 1244A located on both sides of the top surface 1244B. Then, when the concave portion 1245 is used as a reference, the branch convex portion 1244 has two step portions, which are higher in the order of the top surface 1244A and the top surface 1244B. In the drawing, the top surface 1244B is hatched in the lateral direction. The height difference between the top surface 1243B and the top surface 1243A of the branch convex portion 1244 was set to 0.28 μm on average. Other specifications of the trunk convex portion 1243, the branch convex portion 1244, and the concave portion 1245 are the same as those in Table 7. The top surface 1243B of the trunk convex portion 1243 and the top surface 1244B of the branch convex portion 1244 are at the same level.

Further, as shown in a schematic perspective view of a modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-6 in FIG. 38, a virtual vertical direction parallel to the extending direction of the branch protrusion 1244 is shown. The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1244 when the branch convex portion 1244 is cut in a plane is such that the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1244 toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 1244. It can also be set as the form which has the cross-sectional shape to carry out.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-6 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-4, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the same manner as in Example 2B-4, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 1243 can be composed of a top surface 1243B and top surfaces 1243A located on both sides of the top surface 1243B.

<Example 2B-7>
Example 2B-7 is a modification of the liquid crystal display device described in Examples 2A-1 to 2B-6. Alternatively, the 3B structure of the first electrode, specifically, the first electrode It relates to the 3B-1 structure. FIG. 39 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7. The example shown in FIG. 39 is a modification of Example 2A-1. Alternatively, FIG. 40 shows a schematic plan view of a modification of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7. The example shown in FIG. It is a modification of. FIG. 41 shows a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along the arrow AA in FIG.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7, the

first electrodes

140 and 1140 are formed with a plurality of concave and

convex portions

141 and 1141, and the first substrate 140 located between the

pixels

10 and 10 is formed on the first substrate.

Convex structures

147 and 1147 are formed from the portion to the portion of the first substrate corresponding to the pixel peripheral portion, and the

peripheral portions

141A and 1141A of the concave and

convex portions

141 and 1141 are formed on the

convex structures

147 and 1147. Yes. Here, the

convex structures

147 and 1147 are specifically formed based on the black matrix 1147A formed in the color filter layer 23. The black matrix 1147A is made of a photocurable resin to which carbon is added. The specifications of the trunk

convex portions

143 and 1143, the branch

convex portions

144 and 1144, and the

concave portions

145 and 1145 are as shown in Tables 3 and 6, and the height difference between the top surface 1143B and the top surface 1143A of the trunk convex portion 1143 is as follows. Was 0.20 μm on average. The height from the smoothing film 22 to the end portions of the

uneven portions

141 and 1141 is an average of 0.3 μm.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-7, the

peripheral portions

141A and 1141A of the concavo-

convex portions

141 and 1141 are formed on the

convex structures

147 and 1147, so that the peripheral portions of the concavo-convex portions are even more flat than in the case where they are flat. A strong electric field is generated around the uneven part. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the

peripheral portions

141A and 1141A of the

uneven portions

141 and 1141 can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the

peripheral portions

141A and 1141A of the

uneven portions

141 and 1141 is defined reliably. be able to. Therefore, good voltage response characteristics can be maintained.

The convex structure is not limited to the form formed on the basis of the black matrix, but the liquid crystal display device component formed on the first substrate 20 or above the first substrate 20, for example, various signals. It can also be composed of lines, auxiliary capacitance electrodes, gate electrodes, source / drain electrodes, and various wirings. In this case, by optimizing the thickness of the smoothing film 22, a convex structure can be formed in the smoothing film 22 due to the influence of the thickness of the liquid crystal display device components.

Also, a 3B-2 structure of the first electrode can be used. That is, the peripheral portions of the

uneven portions

241 and 1241 described in Embodiment 2A-4 and Embodiment 2B-4, specifically, the trunk convex portion (main convex portion) 243 formed in a frame shape on the pixel peripheral portion. It goes without saying that 1243 can be formed on the

convex structures

147, 1147. Alternatively, the convex structure of Example 2B-7 can also be applied to Example 2B-8 or later examples.

<Example 2B-8>
Example 2B-8 relates to the 3C structure of the first electrode, and is a modification of Example 2A-1 to Example 2A-3 (second structure of the first electrode), Example 2B-1 to Example 2B -3 (the 3rd A-1 structure of the first electrode), and modification of Example 2B-7 (the 3rd B-1 structure of the first electrode). A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8 is shown in FIG. 42 or FIG. In addition, FIGS. 95A and 95B are conceptual diagrams showing the behavior of liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8, as shown in FIGS. 19, 24, and 39, the first electrode 140 has a plurality of uneven portions 141, and the uneven portions 141 are It is composed of a trunk convex portion 143 extending through the center of the pixel and extending in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions 144 extending from the trunk convex portion 143 toward the pixel peripheral portion. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 25, 28, 29, 31, 32, and 40, the first electrode 1140 has a plurality of uneven portions 1141, and the uneven portions 1141 are centered on the pixel. And a plurality of branch convex portions 1144 extending from the trunk convex portion 1143 toward the pixel peripheral portion. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 or FIG. 43, an orientation regulating portion 161 is formed in the portion of the second electrode 160 corresponding to the trunk

convex portions

143, 1143.

Here, the orientation restricting portion 161 is specifically composed of a 4.0 μm slit portion 162 provided on the second electrode 160 (see FIGS. 42 and 95A), or alternatively provided on the second electrode 160. It consists of a protruding portion (rib) 163 (see FIGS. 43 and 95B). More specifically, the protrusion 163 is made of a negative photoresist material (manufactured by JSR Corporation: Optomer AL), and has a width of 1.4 μm and a height of 1.2 μm. The specifications of the trunk convex portion 1143, the branch convex portion 1144, and the concave portion 1145 were as shown in Table 6, and the height difference between the top surface 1143B and the top surface 1143A of the trunk convex portion 1143 was set to 0.20 μm on average. The planar shape of the slit 162 or the protrusion (rib) 163 is a cross shape, and the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion 163 is an isosceles triangle. The second electrode 160 is not formed on the slit part 162 or the protrusion part 163.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-8, the alignment regulating portion 161 including the slit portion 162 is formed in the portion of the second electrode 160 corresponding to the trunk

convex portions

143 and 1143, so that it is generated by the second electrode 160. The applied electric field is distorted in the vicinity of the orientation restricting portion 161. Alternatively, since the alignment restricting portion 161 including the protruding portion (rib) 163 is formed, the direction in which the liquid crystal molecules fall in the vicinity of the protruding portion 163 is defined. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion 161 can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the alignment restricting portion 161 can be reliably defined. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved. In addition, the orientation control part 161 can also be comprised from the part of the 2nd electrode 160 which became projection shape.

Note that Example 2B-8 can be applied to Examples after Example 2C-1, and Example 2B-9 described below can also be applied to Examples after Example 2C-1. it can.

<Example 2B-9>
Example 2B-9 relates to the 3D structure of the first electrode, and is a modification of Example 2A-4 (2-2 structure of the first electrode), Examples 2B-4 to 2B-6 (first This relates to a modification of the 3A-2 structure of one electrode) and a modification of Example 2B-7 (3B-2 structure of the first electrode). 44, 45, 46 and 47 are schematic plan views of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9. The examples shown in FIGS. This is a modification of Example 2A-4. The example shown in FIGS. 45 and 47 is a modification of Example 2B-4, in which a plurality of uneven portions 1241 are formed on the first electrode 1240, and further, a plurality of step portions are formed. . 48A and 48B show schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 45, and along arrows CC and DD in FIG. 48C and 48D show schematic partial cross-sectional views of the first electrode and the like.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9,
A plurality of concave and

convex portions

241 and 1241 are formed on the

first electrodes

240 and 1240,
The concavo-

convex portions

241 and 1241 are constituted by trunk

convex portions

243 and 1243 formed in a frame shape around the pixel periphery, and a plurality of branch

convex portions

244 and 1244 extending from the stem

convex portions

243 and 1243 toward the inside of the pixel. And
The

first electrodes

240 and 1240 have slits 248 and 1248 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) or protrusions (ribs) 249 and 1249 (see FIGS. 46 and 47) that pass through the center of the pixel and are parallel to the periphery of the pixel. ) Is formed. That is, slit

portions

248 and 1248 or

protrusions

249 and 1249 are formed in a cross-shaped concave portion provided in the center of the pixel. The planar shape of the

slits

248 and 1248 or the

protrusions

249 and 1249 is a cross. The specifications of the trunk

convex portions

243 and 1243, the branch

convex portions

244 and 1244, and the

concave portions

245 and 1245 are as shown in Table 3 and Table 7, respectively. The widths of the

slit portions

248 and 1248 were 4.0 μm. Further, the

protrusions

249 and 1249 made of a negative photoresist material (manufactured by JSR Corporation: Optomer AL) had a width of 1.4 μm and a height of 1.2 μm. The cross-sectional shape of the

protrusions

249 and 1249 is an isosceles triangle. The

first electrodes

240 and 1240 are not formed on the

slits

248 and 1248 or the

protrusions

249 and 1249.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2B-9, the first electrode is formed with a slit or protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel. Compared to the case where a concave portion is formed on the first electrode, the electric field generated by the first electrode is distorted in the vicinity of the slit portion or the protrusion portion (when the slit portion is formed), or the liquid crystal molecules The direction of falling is defined (when a protrusion is formed). As a result, it is possible to increase the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion or the projection portion, and to reliably define the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion or the projection portion. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved. Note that the

protrusions

249 and 1249 can be formed in the

first electrodes

240 and 1240 so that a cross-shaped convex portion passing through the center of the pixel is surrounded by the concave portion. Such a cross-shaped projection can be provided by forming a cross-shaped projection on the lower side of the

first electrodes

240, 1240, or alternatively, the formation of the projections and depressions in the

first electrodes

240, 1240. It is also possible to provide the same method. Alternatively, instead of providing the

slit portions

248 and 1248 or the protruding portions (ribs) 249 and 1249, a cross-shaped concave portion that passes through the center of the pixel may be provided.

<Example 2C-1>
Example 2C-1 relates to the fourth structure of the first electrode, specifically, the 4A structure of the first electrode. FIG. 49 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1, and FIG. 50 shows one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1. FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B are schematic plan views enlarging a part of the first electrode of FIG. 51, and FIG. 51A and FIG. FIG. 51C is a schematic partial cross-sectional view in which a part of FIG. 51B is enlarged. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1 is substantially the same as FIGS.

The liquid crystal display devices of Example 2C-1 or Example 2C-2 to Example 2C-8 described later are similar to the liquid crystal display devices of Example 2A-1 to Example 2A-3.
A first substrate 20 and a second substrate 50,
First electrodes (pixel electrodes) 2140, 2240, 2340, 2440 formed on the facing surface of the first substrate 20 facing the second substrate 50,
A second electrode (counter electrode) 160 formed on the facing surface of the second substrate 50 facing the first substrate 20, and
A liquid crystal layer 70 provided between the

first electrodes

2140, 2240, 2340, 2440 and the second electrode 160 and including

liquid crystal molecules

71A, 71B, 71C;
Is a liquid crystal display device in which a plurality of pixels 10 (10A, 10B, 10C) having an alignment are arranged, and a pretilt is given to the liquid crystal molecules.
The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt. Specifically, the liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt at least on the first electrode side. Note that the liquid crystal molecules have negative dielectric anisotropy. And
The

first electrodes

2140, 2240, 2340, and 2440 are formed with a plurality of concave and

convex portions

2141, 2241, 2341, and 2241,
The widths of some of the

convex portions

2142, 2242, 2342, 2242 provided on the

first electrodes

2140, 2240, 2340, 2440 are narrowed toward the tip. In the drawings, the

concave portions

2145, 2245, 2345, and 2445 are hatched extending in the vertical direction.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1, the uneven portion 2141 passes through the center of the pixel and extends to the periphery of the pixel from the trunk convex portion (main convex portion) 2143 that extends in a cross shape and the trunk convex portion 2143. A plurality of branch convex portions (sub-convex portions) 2144 are formed. Here, the plurality of branch convex portions 2144 correspond to part of the convex portions provided on the first electrode 2140. The width of the branch convex portion 2144 is the widest at the portion 2144a of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion 2143, and narrows from the portion 2144a joined to the trunk convex portion 2143 toward the tip portion 2144b (specifically, , Narrowed linearly). More specifically, when assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system in which each of the trunk convex portions 2143 extending in a cross shape is an X axis and a Y axis,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2144 ₁ occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2144 ₂ occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2144 ₃ occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2144 ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. The plurality of branch projections 2144 ₁ occupying the first quadrant extends at an angle of 45 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of branch projections 2144 ₂ occupying the second quadrant is the axis of the X axis. A plurality of branch convex portions 2144 ₃ extending at 135 degrees and occupying the third quadrant has an axis extending at 225 degrees with the X axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions 2144 ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant are Its axis extends 315 degrees with the X axis.

The specifications of the trunk convex portion 2143, the branch convex portion 2144, and the concave portion 2145 are as shown in Table 8 below. The width of the trunk convex portion 2143 was set to 8.0 μm. Further, an angle α ₀ (for example, see FIG. 97) formed by the axis of the branch convex portion and the outer edge of the trunk convex portion was set to 45 degrees.

[Table 8]
Branch pitch formation pitch P: 8.0 μm
Width W ₂ at the tip of the branch convex portion: 4.0 μm
Width W ₁ of root portion of branch convex portion: 6.0 μm
Distance W ₃ between branch convex portions: 2.0 μm
Average width of branch convex part W _ave1 : 5.0 μm
Total taper width TP of the branch convex part: 2.0 μm

When manufacturing a liquid crystal display device, a pretilt is applied to the liquid crystal molecules while a voltage is applied to the electrodes. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B, the liquid crystal molecules A located at the tip edge portion a or in the vicinity thereof (referred to as “tip region” for convenience) have a major axis direction (director) at the trunk convex portion. Tilt toward. Then, assuming a region in the thickness direction including the liquid crystal molecules A in the liquid crystal layer, one pixel excluding the edge portions of the branch convex portions where the movement of the liquid crystal molecules A is affected by the local electric field due to the structure. It is transmitted to the entire liquid crystal molecules (referred to as “liquid crystal molecule A ′” for the sake of convenience), and the director of the liquid crystal molecules A ′ is inclined toward the trunk convex portion. Here, in the liquid crystal display device in which the branch convex portions are not tapered as shown in FIG. 52B, the branch convex portions are tapered as shown in FIG. 52A. Example 2C-1 In some cases, the movement of the liquid crystal molecules A is less likely to be transmitted to the liquid crystal molecules A ′, or it may take a longer time for the movement of the liquid crystal molecules A to be transmitted to the liquid crystal molecules A ′.

When a voltage is applied to the electrodes when displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal molecules in the entire liquid crystal layer change so that the director is parallel to the first substrate and the second substrate. In FIGS. 52A and 52B, the direction of the electric field at the side edge portion is indicated by a white arrow. Here, when a columnar region is assumed in the thickness direction in the liquid crystal layer including the liquid crystal molecules B located in the side edge portion b or in the vicinity thereof (referred to as “side region” for convenience), Rotation occurs in the liquid crystal molecules arranged in the thickness direction. That is, the direction of the director of the liquid crystal molecule B located in the side region and the direction of the director of the liquid crystal molecules aligned in the thickness direction in the columnar region including the liquid crystal molecule B (referred to as “liquid crystal molecule B ′” for convenience). It will be in a different state. Note that an angle formed by the director of the liquid crystal molecules B and the director of the liquid crystal molecules B ′ is β. Here, as shown in FIG. 52B, in the liquid crystal display device in which the branch convex portions are not tapered, the range of the rotation angle of the liquid crystal molecules is wide (that is, the angle β is large). The ratio of liquid crystal molecules having retardation in the direction or Y-axis direction may be small. Therefore, the light transmittance in the branch convex portion is made non-uniform, which may cause dark lines. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52A, in Example 2C-1 in which the branch convex portions are tapered, the rotation angle range of the liquid crystal molecules is narrow (that is, the angle β is small). The ratio of liquid crystal molecules having retardation in the direction or Y-axis direction is large. Therefore, the occurrence of dark lines can be suppressed without causing nonuniform light transmittance in the branch convex portions.

In the fine slit structure, in the slit in which no electrode is provided, the electric field can hardly affect the liquid crystal molecules, and the liquid crystal molecules may be difficult to be aligned in a desired direction (not easily collapsed). Therefore, dark lines are generated corresponding to the slits, which may cause a decrease in light transmittance. In Example 2C-1, since the liquid crystal molecules are affected by the electric field in the entire region within the pixel, dark lines are unlikely to occur.

As described above, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1, the first electrode has a plurality of uneven portions, and the width of a part of the protruded portions provided on the first electrode is as follows. It narrows toward the tip. Therefore, the generation of dark lines can be further reduced. That is, a more uniform high light transmittance can be realized, and a better voltage response characteristic can be obtained. In addition, since the improvement of the initial alignment can be expected, as described above, when the liquid crystal cell is irradiated with uniform ultraviolet light in a state where an AC electric field of a rectangular wave is applied to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, The time for applying pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules can be shortened. In addition, since a reduction in alignment defects can be expected, the yield is improved and the production cost of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Furthermore, since the light transmittance can be improved, low power consumption of the backlight and TFT reliability can be improved.

<Example 2C-2>
Example 2C-2 is a modification of Example 2C-1, and relates to the 4B structure of the first electrode. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-2 is shown in FIG. 53, and the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 54A and 54B are schematic partial end views of FIG. 54A, and FIG. 54C is a schematic partial end view of an enlarged part of FIG. 54B.

In Example 2C-2, the uneven portion 2241 includes a stem convex portion (main convex portion) 2243 formed in a frame shape on the periphery of the pixel, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion 2243 toward the inside of the pixel. (Sub-convex portion) 2244. And also in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-2, the plurality of branch convex portions 2244 correspond to a part of the convex portions provided on the first electrode, and the width of the branch convex portion 2244 is: The branch convex portion 2244a joined to the trunk convex portion 2243 is the widest, and the portion 2244a joined to the trunk convex portion 2243 is narrowed toward the distal end portion 2244b. More specifically, the width of the branch convex portion 2244 is linearly narrowed from the portion 2244a joined to the trunk convex portion 2243 toward the distal end portion 2244b. Reference numeral 2245 indicates a recess.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-2, when an (X, Y) coordinate system is assumed in which straight lines passing through the center of the pixel and parallel to the periphery of the pixel are the X axis and the Y axis, respectively. ,
A plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₁ occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₂ occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₃ occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.

The plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₁ occupying the first quadrant extends at an angle of 45 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₂ occupying the second quadrant is the axis of the X axis. A plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₃ extending 135 degrees and occupying the third quadrant has an axis extending 225 degrees with the X axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions 2244 ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant, Its axis extends 315 degrees with the X axis.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-2 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-1, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Example 2C-3>
Example 2C-3 relates to the 4C structure of the first electrode, specifically, the 4C-1 structure of the first electrode. FIG. 55 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3 is substantially the same as FIGS. Also, a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA, BB, and CC in FIG. 55 is substantially the same as FIGS. 26A, 26B, and 26C. It is.

In FIG. 55, FIG. 56, FIG. 57, FIG. 58, FIG. 59, FIG. 60, and FIG. As described in Example 2C-1 to Example 2C-2, the branch convex portion is tapered. That is, the width of the branch convex portion is the widest at the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion, and narrows from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip portion.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3, the first electrode 2340 has a plurality of concave and convex portions 2341 (the convex portions 2342 and the concave portions 2345), and the convex portions 2342 provided on the first electrode 2340. A plurality of stepped portions are formed in. Further, the uneven portion 2341 passes through the center of the pixel and has a trunk convex portion (main convex portion) 2343 extending in a cross shape and a plurality of branch convex portions (sub convex portions) extending from the trunk convex portion 2343 toward the pixel peripheral portion. 2344. The width of the branch convex portion 2344 is the widest at the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion 2343 and is narrowed from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion 2343 toward the tip portion (specifically, Narrowed in a straight line).

Here, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 2343 when the stem convex portion 2343 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 2343 is the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 2343. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape. Specifically, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 2343 includes a top surface 2343B at the center of the trunk convex portion 2343 and a top surface 2343A located on both sides of the top surface 2343B. Thus, the trunk convex portion 2343 has two stepped portions, and the top surface 2343A and the top surface 2343B become higher in this order when the concave portion 2345 is used as a reference. Although the top surface of the branch convex portion 2344 is indicated by reference numeral 2344A, the top surface 2343A of the trunk convex portion 2343 and the top surface 2344A of the branch convex portion 2344 are at the same level. In the drawing, the top surface 2343B of the trunk convex portion 2343 is hatched in the lateral direction, and the concave portion 2345 is hatched in the vertical direction.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device described in Example 2C-1.

<Example 2C-4>
Example 2C-4 is a modification of Example 2C-3. FIG. 56 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-4. A schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like taken along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 56 is substantially the same as FIGS. 30A and 30B.

In Example 2C-4, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 2343 is located outside the top surface 2343C at the center of the trunk convex portion 2343, the top surface 2343B located on both sides of the top surface 2343C, and the top surface 2343B. It consists of a top surface 2343A. As described above, the trunk convex portion 2343 has three step portions, and the top surface 2343A, the top surface 2343B, and the top surface 2343C become higher in this order when the concave portion 2345 is used as a reference. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 2343 when the stem convex portion 2343 is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 2343 is from the center (top surface 2343C) of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 2343. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the trunk convex portion 2343 (top surface 2343B and top surface 2343A). In the drawing, the top surface 2343C is cross-hatched.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-4 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Example 2C-5>
Example 2C-5 is also a modification of Example 2C-3. FIG. 57 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-5. A schematic partial end view of the first electrode and the like along the arrow CC in FIG. 57 is substantially the same as FIG. 30C, and a schematic partial end view in which a part is enlarged. Is substantially the same as FIG. 30D.

In Example 2C-5, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2344 when the branch convex portion 2344 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion 2344 is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2344. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2344. Specifically, the top surface of the branch convex portion 2344 includes a top surface 2344B extending from the trunk convex portion 2343 and top surfaces 2344A located on both sides of the top surface 2344B. Thus, there are two stepped portions in the branch convex portion 2344, and the top surface 2344A and the top surface 2344B become higher in this order when the concave portion 2345 is used as a reference. In the drawing, the top surface 2344B is hatched in the lateral direction. In FIGS. 57, 58, and 61, the boundary between the trunk convex portion and the branch convex portion is indicated by a solid line. The height difference between the top surface 2343B and the top surface 2343A of the branch convex portion 2344 was set to an average of 0.20 μm. The top surface 2343B of the trunk convex portion 2343 and the top surface 2344B of the branch convex portion 2344 are at the same level.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-5 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-3, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58, which is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device, the branch protrusion 2344 is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch protrusion 2344. The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2344 is such that the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2344 toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2344. You can also Further, it can be combined with the trunk convex portion 2343 described in the embodiment 2C-4.

<Example 2C-6>
Example 2C-6 is also a modification of Example 2C-3, but relates to the 4C-2 structure of the first electrode. FIG. 59 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6. Note that schematic partial end views of the first electrode and the like along arrows AA and BB in FIG. 59 are substantially the same as those shown in FIGS. 36A, 36B, and 36C.

Also in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6, the first electrode 2440 has a plurality of concave and convex portions 2441 (the convex portion 2442 and the concave portion 2445), and the convex portion 2442 provided on the first electrode 2440 includes A plurality of step portions are formed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6, the concavo-convex portion 2441 includes a stem convex portion (main convex portion) 2443 formed in a frame shape on the periphery of the pixel, and the stem convex portion 2443 to the inside of the pixel. It is comprised from the several branch convex part (subconvex part) 2444 extended toward. The width of the branch convex portion 2444 is the widest at the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion 2443 and is narrowed from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion 2443 toward the tip portion (specifically, Narrowed in a straight line).

Here, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 2443 when the stem convex portion 2443 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 2443 is the stem convex portion from the outer edge of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 2443. 2443 has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the inner edge of the cross-sectional shape of 2443. Specifically, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 2443 includes a top surface 2443B in the vicinity of the outer edge portion of the trunk convex portion 2443 and a top surface 2443A in the vicinity of the inner edge portion. As described above, the trunk convex portion 2443 has two step portions, and the top surface 2443A and the top surface 2443B become higher in this order when the concave portion 2445 is used as a reference. The top surface of the branch convex portion 2444 is indicated by reference numeral 2444A, but the top surface 2443A of the trunk convex portion 2443 and the top surface 2444A of the branch convex portion 2444 are at the same level. In the drawing, the top surface 2443B of the trunk convex portion 2443 is hatched in the lateral direction, and the concave portion 2445 is hatched in the vertical direction. The shape of the concave portion located at the center of the pixel is generally cross-shaped.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device described in Example 2C-2 or Example 2C-3.

In Example 2C-6, since the plurality of step portions are formed on the stem convex portion 2443, the electric field is highest at the outer edge of the stem convex portion 2443, and the inner edge of the stem convex portion 2443 The electric field decreases toward. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the trunk convex portion 2443 can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the trunk convex portion 2443 can be reliably defined. Therefore, at the time of image display, dark lines are unlikely to occur in the image portion corresponding to the trunk convex portion 2443. That is, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance while maintaining a good voltage response characteristic, and to reduce the cost of the light source constituting the backlight and reduce the power consumption. In addition, the reliability of the TFT can be improved.

<Example 2C-7>
Example 2C-7 is a modification of Example 2C-6. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-7 is shown in FIG. Note that a schematic partial end view of the first electrode taken along the arrow DD in FIG. 60 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 36D.

In Example 2C-7, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 2443 is composed of a top surface 2443C in the vicinity of the outer edge portion of the trunk convex portion 2443, and a top surface 2443B and a top surface 2443A toward the inner edge portion. Has been. Thus, the trunk convex portion 2443 has three step portions, and the top surface 2443A, the top surface 2443B, and the top surface 2443C become higher in this order when the concave portion 2445 is used as a reference. In the drawing, the top surface 2443C is cross-hatched. The height difference between the top surface 2443C and the top surface 2443B of the trunk convex portion 2443 and the height difference between the top surface 2443B and the top surface 2443A were set to 0.20 μm on average.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-7 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Example 2C-8>
Example 2C-8 is a modification of Example 2C-7. FIG. 61 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-8.

In Example 2C-8, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2444 when the branch convex portion 2444 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion 2444 is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2444. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2444. Specifically, the top surface of the branch convex portion 2444 includes a top surface 2444B extending from the top surface 2443B of the trunk convex portion 2443 and top surfaces 2444A located on both sides of the top surface 2444B. Then, when the concave portion 2445 is used as a reference, the branch convex portion 2444 has two stepped portions, which are higher in the order of the top surface 2444A and the top surface 2444B. In the drawing, the top surface 2444B is hatched in the lateral direction. The height difference between the top surface 2443B and the top surface 2443A of the branch convex portion 2444 was set to an average of 0.28 μm. The top surface 2443B of the trunk convex portion 2443 and the top surface 2444B of the branch convex portion 2444 are at the same level.

The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2444 when the branch convex portion 2444 is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion 2444 is the branch convex portion from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 2444. It can also be set as the form which has a cross-sectional shape in which a level | step-difference part descend | falls toward the edge part of the cross-sectional shape of 2444.

Except for the above, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-8 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2C-6, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In the same manner as in Example 2C-6, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 2443 can be composed of a top surface 2443B and top surfaces 2443A located on both sides of the top surface 2443B.

<Example 2D-1>
Example 2D-1 relates to the 5A structure of the first electrode. FIG. 62 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1, and FIG. 63A shows the first electrode along the arrow AA in FIG. FIG. 63B is a schematic partial cross-sectional view in which a part of FIG. 63A is enlarged. A schematic partial end view of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1 is substantially the same as FIGS. 16 to 18.

The liquid crystal display devices of Example 2D-1 or Example 2D-2 to Example 2D-12 described later are similar to the liquid crystal display devices of Example 2A-1 to Example 2A-3.
A first substrate 20 and a second substrate 50,
First electrodes (pixel electrodes) 3140, 3240, 3340, 3440 formed on the facing surface of the first substrate 20 facing the second substrate 50.
A second electrode (counter electrode) 160 formed on the facing surface of the second substrate 50 facing the first substrate 20, and
A liquid crystal layer 70 provided between the

first electrodes

3140, 3240, 3340, 3440 and the second electrode 160 and including

liquid crystal molecules

71A, 71B, 71C;
Is a liquid crystal display device in which a plurality of pixels 10 (10A, 10B, 10C) are arranged, and a pretilt is given to the liquid crystal molecules,
A plurality of concave and

convex portions

3141, 3241, 3341, 3441 are formed on the

first electrodes

3140, 3240, 3340, 3440. Specifically, a pretilt is imparted to at least the liquid crystal molecules on the first electrode side. Note that the liquid crystal molecules have negative dielectric anisotropy.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1, when the X axis and the Y axis passing through the center of the pixel 10 are assumed, specifically, the liquid crystal display device passes through the center of the pixel 10 and is parallel to the pixel peripheral portion. Assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system with each straight line as the X-axis and Y-axis,
The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₁ occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₂ occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₃ occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₁ occupying the first quadrant extends at an angle of 45 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of convex portions 3144A ₂ occupying the second quadrant has an axis of 135 degrees with the X axis. The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₃ occupying the third quadrant extend in an axis of 225 degrees with the X axis, and the plurality of convex portions 3144A ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant have an axis X Extends 315 degrees with the axis. The convex portion 3144A is line symmetric with respect to the X axis, is also line symmetric with respect to the Y axis, and is 180 degrees rotationally symmetric (point symmetric) with respect to the pixel center.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1, unlike the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1, no trunk convex portion is provided, and the convex portion 3144A in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1 is This corresponds to the branch protrusion in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2A-1. And
Each of the protrusions 3144A ₁₁ extending from the X axis and occupying the first quadrant is joined to each of the protrusions 3144A ₄₁ extending from the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant,
Each of the convex portions 3144A ₁₂ extending from the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant is joined to each of the convex portions 3144A ₂₂ extending from the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant,
Each of the convex portions 3144A ₂₁ extending from the X axis and occupying the second quadrant is joined to each of the convex portions 3144A ₃₁ extending from the X axis and occupying the third quadrant,
Each of the convex portions 3144A ₃₂ extending from the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant is joined to each of the convex portions 3144A ₄₂ extending from the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant. That is, the planar shape of the convex portion 3144A is a “V” shape. The subscripts “11”, “12” and the like in the reference numbers indicating the convex portions and the subscript characters in the reference numbers indicating the convex portions in various embodiments described later indicate the same convex portions.

The specifications of the convex portion 3144A and the concave portion 3145 are as shown in Table 9 below.

[Table 9]
Average height of protrusions: 0.2 μm
Projection pitch: 5.0 μm
Width of convex part: 2.5 μm
Recess width: 2.5 μm

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-1, the plurality of convex portions 3144A ₁ occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value increases, The plurality of convex portions 3144A ₂ occupying the quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases, and the plurality of convex portions 3144A ₃ occupying the third quadrant have the X coordinate value. When decreasing, the plurality of convex portions 3144A ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value increases. In other words, there is no protruding portion extending in parallel with the X axis or protruding portion extending in parallel with the Y axis except for the tip of the protruding portion 3144A. In addition, the tip of the convex portion 3144A is constituted by a line segment orthogonal to the axis of the convex portion 3144A, or the tip of the convex portion 3144A is constituted by a curve so that the convex portion extending in parallel with the X axis is formed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which there is no portion or a convex portion extending in parallel with the Y axis. Here, the absorption axis of the first polarizing plate is parallel to the X axis or the Y axis, and the absorption axis of the second polarizing plate is parallel to the Y axis or the X axis. Therefore, the generation of dark lines can be further reduced. That is, a more uniform high light transmittance can be realized, and a better voltage response characteristic can be obtained. In addition, since the initial alignment is improved, as described above, when the liquid crystal cell is irradiated with uniform ultraviolet rays with a rectangular wave AC electric field applied to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, The time for applying the pretilt can be shortened. Furthermore, since a reduction in alignment defects can be expected, the yield is improved and the production cost of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced. Furthermore, since the light transmittance can be improved, low power consumption of the backlight and TFT reliability can be improved.

<Example 2D-2>
Example 2D-2 is a modification of Example 2D-1. FIG. 64A, FIG. 64B, FIG. 65A, and FIG. 65B show schematic plan views in which a part of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-2 is enlarged. 64A, 64B, 65A, and 65B are schematic plan views in which a portion of the first electrode surrounded by a circular region in the schematic plan view of the first electrode in FIG. 62 is enlarged. In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-2, a protrusion 3151 extending toward the periphery of the pixel 10 is provided at the joint 3144B ′ of the two protrusions 3144B. The protrusion 3151 can be configured to be surrounded by a plurality of line segments (two line segments in the illustrated example) as shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, and as shown in FIG. 65A, A configuration surrounded by a single curve may be used, or a configuration surrounded by a plurality of curves (two curves in the illustrated example) as shown in FIG. 65B. It can also be set as the structure enclosed by the combination of a line segment and a curve. In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the tip of the protruding portion 3151 is not in contact with the joint portion between the two convex portions adjacent in the peripheral portion direction of the pixel. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 64B, the tip of the projecting portion 3151 is in contact with a joint portion between two convex portions adjacent to each other in the peripheral portion direction of the pixel.

Even with such a configuration, there is no portion of a convex portion extending parallel to the X axis, or a portion of a convex portion extending parallel to the Y axis, or the length is very small even if it exists. Moreover, since the protrusion 3151 is provided on the inner side of the bottom of the “V” shape of the protrusion, the protrusion 3151 is not provided on the bottom of the “V” shape of the protrusion. The alignment state of the liquid crystal molecules located in the vicinity of the inside of the bottom portion of the “V” shape of the convex portion can be made further desired as compared with the case.

<Example 2D-3>
Example 2D-3 is also a modification of Example 2D-1. In Example 2D-1, the convex portion 3144A was joined on the X axis or the Y axis, and the planar shape of the convex portion 3144A was a “V” shape. On the other hand, in Example 2D-3, the convex portion 3144C is not joined on the X axis or the Y axis. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-3 is shown.
Each of the convex portions 3144C ₁₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant is not joined to each of the convex portions 3144C ₄₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant,
Each of the convex portions 3144C ₁₂ extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant is not joined to each of the convex portions 3144C ₂₂ extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant,
Each of the convex portions 3144C ₂₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant is not joined to each of the convex portions 3144C ₃₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant,
Each of the convex portions 3144C ₃₂ extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant is not joined to each of the convex portions 3144C ₄₂ extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant.

Note that each of the convex portions 3144C is not joined, but may be in a contacted state. Here, “joining” refers to a state in which the convex portions intersect with each other at a certain length, and “contacting” means that each convex portion has a very short length (one type) , In the form of dots).

Even with such a configuration, there is no convex portion extending parallel to the X axis, or no convex portion extending parallel to the Y axis. Or, if present, the length is short. Accordingly, the same effect as described in Example 2D-1 can be obtained.

<Example 2D-4>
Example 2D-4 is a modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-3. As shown in FIG. 67, which is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-4, the width of the convex portion 3144D becomes narrower toward the peripheral portion of the pixel 10. Specifically, the width of the convex portion 3144D is the widest in the X axis, the Y axis, or the vicinity thereof, and narrows toward the peripheral portion of the pixel 10 (more specifically, linearly narrows). ing).

<Example 2D-5>
Example 2D-5 is a modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-4, and relates to the 5A-1 structure of the first electrode, and further to the 5C structure of the first electrode.

68A, 68B, 68C, 69A, 69B, 69C, 70A, and 70B are schematic plan views of the first electrode and the like for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5. 70C, FIG. 71A, FIG. 71B, and FIG. 71C, the first electrode 3140 is provided with a slit portion 3152 in addition to the concavo-convex portion 3141. The slit 3152 is not formed with a transparent conductive material layer constituting the first electrode 3140. 72A is a schematic end view taken along arrow AA in FIG. 68C, FIG. 72B is a schematic end view taken along arrow BB in FIG. 69C, and FIG. FIG. 72C is a schematic end view taken along arrow CC in FIG. 70C, and FIG. 72D is a schematic end view taken along arrow DD in FIG. 71C.

In Example 2D-5, the slit portion 3152 is formed in the convex region 3144E '. Here, as shown in FIGS. 68A, 68B, and 68C, the slit portion 3152 is provided in a region including the central region (center portion) 3152A of the pixel 10. 68A schematically shows the arrangement state of the convex portion 3144E, the convex region 3144E ′, the concave portion 3145, and the central region 3152A, and the arrangement state of the slit portion 3152 provided in the first electrode 3140 is schematically shown in FIG. 68B. 68C is a diagram in which the uneven portion 3141 and the slit portion 3152 are overlapped with each other. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 69A, FIG. 69B, and FIG. 69C, the slit portion 3152 has one convex region 3144E ′ (specifically, extending toward the central region (central portion) of the pixel 10 in each quadrant. One convex portion 3144). 69A schematically shows the arrangement state of the convex portion 3144E, the convex portion region 3144E ′, and the concave portion 3145, and the arrangement state of the slit portion 3152 provided in the first electrode 3140 is schematically shown in FIG. 69B. A view in which the portion 3141 and the slit portion 3152 are overlapped is shown in FIG. 69C. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 70A, FIG. 70B, and FIG. 70C, the slit portion 3152 is formed in a convex region 3144E ′ that extends toward the central region (center portion) 3152A of the pixel 10 in each quadrant. 70A schematically shows the arrangement state of the convex portion 3144E, the convex region 3144E ′, the concave portion 3145, and the central region 3152A, and the arrangement state of the slit portion 3152 provided in the first electrode 3140 is schematically shown in FIG. 70B. FIG. 70C is a diagram in which the uneven portion 3141 and the slit portion 3152 are overlapped. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 71A, FIG. 71B, and FIG. 71C, the slit portion 3152 is provided in a region sandwiched between the convex portion extending toward the central region (center portion) 3152A of the pixel 10 and the Y axis. A convex region 3144E ′ is formed. 71A schematically illustrates the arrangement state of the convex portion 3144E, the convex region 3144E ′, the concave portion 3145, and the center region 3152A, and the arrangement state of the slit portion 3152 provided in the first electrode 3140 is schematically illustrated in FIG. 71B. FIG. 71C shows a diagram in which the uneven portion 3141 and the slit portion 3152 are overlapped. Here, in FIGS. 68A, 68B, 68C, 69A, 69B, 69C, 70A, 70B, 70C, 71A, 71B, and 71C, the concave portion 3145 is hatched to extend in the vertical direction. Is attached. 68B, 68C, 69B, 69C, 70B, 70C, 71B, 71C, 83, 84, and 85, the

slit portions

3152 and 3252 are hatched extending in the lateral direction. It is attached. In the region indicated by reference numeral 3152 ′, no slit portion is provided, and a transparent conductive material layer constituting the first electrode 3140 is formed. In the slit portion 3152, the smoothing film 22 is exposed.

Alternatively, FIG. 73A schematically shows an arrangement state of convex portions, concave portions, slit portions, and the like in still another modified example of the pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5, and an arrow B- in FIG. 73A. As shown in FIG. 73B, a schematic cross-sectional view of the first electrode or the like along B may be formed with a slit portion 3152 extending in parallel with the convex portion 3144E at the top of the convex portion 3144E. Alternatively, FIG. 74A schematically shows an arrangement state of convex portions, concave portions, slit portions, and the like in still another modified example of the pixels constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-5, and an arrow B- in FIG. As shown in FIG. 74B, a schematic cross-sectional view of the first electrode or the like along B may be formed with a slit 3152 extending in parallel with the recess 3145 on the bottom surface of the recess 3145. In FIGS. 73A and 74A, or in FIGS. 84 and 85 to be described later, the

slit portions

3152 and 3252 are indicated by thick solid lines. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 73A and 73B, (the width of the convex portion, the width of the concave portion, the width of the slit portion) = (7.0 μm, 3.0 μm, 3.0 μm). In the example shown in 74B, (width of convex part, width of concave part, width of slit part) = (3.0 μm, 7.0 μm, 3.0 μm). Here, the protrusion 3144E isolated from the other protrusion 3144E is not formed by the slit 3152, or the recess 3145 isolated from the other recess 3145 is not formed by the slit 3152, that is, all A slit portion 3152 is formed so that the uneven portion is electrically connected. In the example shown in FIGS. 73A and 74A, the slit portion 3152 is not provided in the convex portion or the concave portion on the X axis and the Y axis. That is, the slit portion 3152 is provided with a notch in the convex portion or concave portion on the X axis and the Y axis. In addition, it is good also as a structure which does not provide a slit part in a convex part or a recessed part in the peripheral part of the pixel 10. FIG.

Thus, in Example 2D-5, since the slit portion 3152 is formed in addition to the uneven portion 3141 in the first electrode 3140, the electric field generated by the first electrode 3140 is in the vicinity of the slit portion 3152. Distortion and the direction in which liquid crystal molecules fall are strongly defined. That is, it is possible to strengthen the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion 3152 and to reliably define the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the slit portion 3152. Therefore, when a liquid crystal display device is manufactured, the liquid crystal layer is exposed to a desired electric field for a predetermined time in order to impart a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, but the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules exposed to the desired electric field is stabilized. The time required can be shortened. That is, a pretilt can be imparted to the liquid crystal molecules in a short time, and the manufacturing time of the liquid crystal display device can be shortened.

The width of the convex portion 3144E and the width of the concave portion 3145 are 2.5 μm, the width of the slit portion 3152 is 2.5 μm, and the slit portion 3152 shown in FIGS. 70A, 70B, 70C, and 71C is configured. In the liquid crystal display device, or in the liquid crystal display device having the configuration of the slit portion 3152 shown in FIGS. 73A and 74A, the time from the voltage application during the pretilt processing to the completion of the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules. Was within 10 seconds.

<Example 2D-6>
Example 2D-6 is a modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-5, and includes a first electrode 5D structure, a first electrode 5A-2 structure, and a first electrode 5C-2 structure. About. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-6 is shown in FIG. 75, and the first region in the central region of one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-6 is shown. 76A, 77A, and 77B are schematic plan views of one electrode portion, and a depression is formed in the first electrode 3140 in the central region of the pixel 10, as shown in FIG. 76B. 3153 is provided.

Here, as shown in FIG. 76B, the recess 3153 is narrowed toward the first substrate. That is, the recess 3153 has a so-called forward tapered slope. The inclination angle of the depression 3153 is 5 to 60 degrees, preferably 20 to 30 degrees. Such an inclination angle can be obtained, for example, by etching the smoothing film 22 based on an etch back method so that the smoothing film 22 is inclined. The shape of the outer edge 3153A of the recess 3153 can be circular (the diameter is 15 μm or 7 μm, for example) as shown in FIG. 76A, or can be rectangular as shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B. (For example, a square having a side length of 12 μm). The angle formed by the outer edge 3153A of the rectangular recess 3153 and the direction in which the convex portion 3144F extends (the outer edge 3153A of the rectangular recess 3153 and the direction in which the convex portion 3144F in which the outer edge 3153A and the extended portion of the convex portion 3144F extend extend. The formed angle may be 90 degrees (see FIG. 77A) or an acute angle, for example, 60 degrees (see FIG. 77B).

As described above, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-6, since the depression 3153 is provided in the first electrode 3140 in the central region of the pixel, the liquid crystal molecules positioned in the vicinity of the depression 3153 It will be in a state of falling toward the center of the. Therefore, when a liquid crystal display device is manufactured, the liquid crystal layer is exposed to a desired electric field for a predetermined time in order to impart a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, but the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules exposed to the desired electric field is stabilized. The time required can be shortened. That is, a pretilt can be imparted to the liquid crystal molecules in a short time, and the manufacturing time of the liquid crystal display device can be shortened.

The width of the convex portion 3144F and the width of the concave portion 3145 are each 2.5 μm, the inclination angle of the depression 3153 is 30 degrees, and the shape of the outer edge 3153A of the depression 3153 is circular as shown in FIG. 76A. In this case, the time from the voltage application during the pretilt treatment to the completion of the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules was within 10 seconds.

In addition, as shown to FIG. 76C, the center part of the hollow 3153 can also be set as the structure which comprises some contact holes (connection hole 35).

<Example 2D-7>
Example 2D-7 is a modification of Example 2D-1 to Example 2D-6, and includes a first electrode 5E structure, a first electrode 5A-3 structure, and a first electrode 5C-3 structure. The present invention relates to the 5D-3 structure of the first electrode. FIG. 78 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-7.

That is, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-7, the formation pitch of the projections 3144G along the X axis is P _X and the formation pitch of the projections 3144G along the Y axis is P _Y (= P _X ), The width of the convex portion 3144G is (P _Y / 2 = P _X / 2), and the width of the concave portion 3145 is (P _Y / 2 = P _X / 2).

In Example 2D-7,
The convex portion 3144G ₁₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion 3144G ₄₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state ( Preferably, they are formed so as to be shifted from each other by (P _X / 2))
The convex portion 3144G ₁₂ extending from the Y axis or its vicinity and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion 3144G ₂₂ extending from the Y axis or its vicinity and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state ( Preferably, they are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2)),
The convex portion 3144G ₂₁ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant and the convex portion 3144G ₃₂ extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state ( Preferably, they are formed so as to be shifted from each other by (P _X / 2))
The convex portion 3144G ₃₁ extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant and the convex portion 3144G ₄₁ extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a state shifted from each other ( preferably formed in a state of mutual (P _Y / 2) shifted). The convex portion 3144G is not line symmetric with respect to the X axis and the Y axis, but is rotationally symmetric (point symmetric) by 180 degrees with respect to the center of the pixel.

Thus, by forming the convex portion 3144G and the convex portion 3144G in a state shifted from each other by a half pitch, the electric field generated by the first electrode 3140 at the center of the pixel is distorted in the vicinity of the center of the pixel. The direction in which the liquid crystal molecules fall is defined. As a result, the alignment regulating force on the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the center of the pixel can be strengthened, and the tilt state of the liquid crystal molecules in the vicinity of the center of the pixel can be defined reliably. Therefore, when a liquid crystal display device is manufactured, the liquid crystal layer is exposed to a desired electric field for a predetermined time in order to impart a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules, but the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules exposed to the desired electric field is stabilized. The time required can be shortened. That is, a pretilt can be imparted to the liquid crystal molecules in a short time, and the manufacturing time of the liquid crystal display device can be shortened.

In the liquid crystal display device in which the width of the convex portion 3144G and the width of the concave portion 3145 are 2.5 μm, and the convex portion 3144G and the convex portion 3144G are shifted from each other by a half pitch, The time from application of the voltage to completion of alignment of the liquid crystal molecules was within 10 seconds.

<Example 2D-8>
Example 2D-8 relates to the 5B structure of the first electrode. FIG. 79 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8, and FIGS. 80A, 80B and 81 show a schematic diagram of the first electrode of FIG. In the typical plan view, a schematic plan view in which a portion of the first electrode surrounded by a circular region is enlarged is shown.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8, when the X axis and the Y axis passing through the center of the pixel 10 are assumed, specifically, a straight line passing through the center of the pixel 10 and parallel to the pixel peripheral portion is used. Assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system with the X and Y axes respectively,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions 3241 includes a stem convex portion 3243 extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions 3244A extending from the side of the stem convex portion 3243 toward the peripheral portion of the pixel 10. And
The extending direction of the side portion 3243 ′ of the trunk convex portion 3243 that is not joined to the branch convex portion 3244A is not parallel to the X axis and not parallel to the Y axis. That is, the extending direction of the side portion 3243 ′ of the trunk convex portion 3243 not joined to the branch convex portion 3244A is a direction different from the X axis and a direction different from the X axis. The trunk convex portion 3243 and the branch convex portion 3244A are line symmetric with respect to the X axis, are also line symmetric with respect to the Y axis, and are 180 degrees rotationally symmetric with respect to the center of the pixel (points). Symmetric).

Specifically, the side portion 3243 ′ of the trunk convex portion 3243 that is not joined to the branch convex portion 3244A is linear as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80A, or alternatively, in FIGS. As shown, it is curved. As shown in FIGS. 79, 80A, 80B, and 81, the width of the portion 3243A of the trunk convex portion 3243 that is not joined to the branch convex portion 3244A becomes narrower toward the tip end portion of the trunk convex portion 3243. ing.

Here, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3244A ₁ occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3244A ₂ occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3244A ₃ occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3244A ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.

That is, the trunk convex portion 3243 and the branch convex portion 3244A are line symmetric with respect to the X axis, are also line symmetric with respect to the Y axis, and are 180 degrees rotationally symmetric with respect to the center of the pixel (points). Symmetric).

Except for the above points, the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8 can have the same configuration and structure as the liquid crystal display device described in Example 2D-1, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

Thus, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8, there is no stem convex portion extending parallel to the X axis or the stem convex portion extending parallel to the Y axis. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device capable of realizing a more uniform high light transmittance, and to have a configuration and a structure capable of giving a pretilt to liquid crystal molecules in a short time. A liquid crystal display device can be provided.

The specifications of the trunk convex portion 3243, the branch convex portion 3244A, and the concave portion 3245 are as shown in Table 10 below.

[Table 10]
Average height of trunk convex part: 0.2 μm
Width of trunk convex part: Minimum 1.0 μm, maximum 2.0 μm
Average height of branch convex part: 0.2 μm
Branch protrusion formation pitch: 5.0 μm
Branch width: 2.5 μm
Recess width: 2.5 μm

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8, as in Example 2D-4, the width of the branch protrusion 3244D can be reduced toward the periphery of the pixel 10 (FIG. 82). reference). Alternatively, similarly to Example 2D-5, the first electrode is further provided with a slit 3252 (the first electrode 5B-1 structure or the first electrode 5C structure). (See FIGS. 83, 84, and 85). FIG. 83 is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting a modification of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8. The slit portion has the same configuration and structure as shown in FIG. 3252 is provided. 84 and 85 are schematic plan views of the first electrode for one pixel constituting a modification of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8, and are the same as those shown in FIGS. 73 and 74. A slit portion 3252 having a configuration and a structure is provided. Here, the slit portion 3252 does not form the branch convex portion 3244D isolated from the other branch convex portion 3244D, or the slit portion 3252 does not form the concave portion 3245 isolated from the other concave portion 3245, that is, The slit portion 3252 is formed so that all the uneven portions are electrically connected. In the example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the trunk convex portion 3243 is not provided with the slit portion 3252. That is, in the trunk convex portion, the slit portion 3252 is provided with a notch. In addition, it is good also as a structure which does not provide a slit part in a branch convex part or a recessed part in the peripheral part of the pixel 10. FIG. Alternatively, as in Example 2D-6, the first electrode in the center region of the pixel 10 is provided with a recess 3253 (first electrode 5B-2 structure, first electrode 5C-2). Structure, 5D structure of the first electrode) (see FIG. 86).

Alternatively, in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-8, as shown in FIG. 87 which is a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel,
When the formation pitch of the branch protrusions along the X axis is P _X and the formation pitch of the branch protrusions along the Y axis is P _Y ,
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. (Preferably formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _X / 2)),
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. (Preferably formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2)),
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. (Preferably formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _X / 2)),
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. (Preferably formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2)) (first electrode 5B-3 structure, first electrode 5C-3 structure, first electrode 5D -3 structure or 5th E structure of the first electrode). That is, the trunk convex portion and the branch convex portion are not line symmetric with respect to the X axis and the Y axis, but are 180 degrees rotationally symmetric (point symmetric) with respect to the center of the pixel.

<Example 2D-9>
Example 2D-9 is also a modification of Example 2D-8. FIG. 88 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9. FIGS. 89A, 89B, and 89C show arrows AA in FIG. A schematic partial cross-sectional view of the first electrode and the like along arrows BB and CC is shown, and FIG. 89D is a schematic partial cross-sectional view enlarging a part of FIG. 89C. Typical partial end views of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9 are substantially the same as those in FIGS.

In FIGS. 88, 90, 91, and 93, the width of the branch protrusion is drawn constant, but the branch protrusion is tapered as described in Example 2D-4. May be. That is, the width of the branch convex portion may be such that the portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion is the widest and narrows from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip portion.

In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9, the first electrode 3340 has a plurality of concave and convex portions 3341 (a trunk convex portion 3343, a branch convex portion 3344, and a concave portion 3345). A plurality of stepped portions are formed on the provided trunk convex portion 3343. In addition, the uneven portion 3341 passes through the center of the pixel and has a trunk convex portion (main convex portion) 3343 extending in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions (sub convex portions) extending from the trunk convex portion 3343 toward the pixel peripheral portion. 3344.

Here, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 3343 when the stem convex portion 3343 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 3343 is the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 3343. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape. Specifically, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 3343 includes a top surface 3343B at the center of the trunk convex portion 3343 and a top surface 3343A located on both sides of the top surface 3343B. Thus, the trunk convex portion 3343 has two stepped portions, and the top surface 3343A and the top surface 3343B become higher in this order when the concave portion 3345 is used as a reference. Although the top surface of the branch convex portion 3344 is indicated by reference numeral 3344A, the top surface 3343A of the trunk convex portion 3343 and the top surface 3344A of the branch convex portion 3344 are at the same level. In the drawing, the top surface 3343B of the trunk convex portion 3343 is hatched in the lateral direction, and the concave portion 3345 is hatched in the vertical direction.

<Example 2D-10>
Example 2D-10 is a modification of Example 2D-9. FIG. 90 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-10. FIGS. 92A and 92B show the arrows AA and B- in FIG. A typical partial sectional view of the 1st electrode etc. along B is shown.

In Example 2D-10, the top surface of the trunk convex portion 3343 is located on the top surface 3343C at the center of the trunk convex portion 3343, the top surface 3343B located on both sides of the top surface 3343C, and the top surface 3343B. It is composed of a top surface 3343A. Thus, the trunk convex portion 3343 has three stepped portions, and the top surface 3343A, the top surface 3343B, and the top surface 3343C become higher in this order when the concave portion 3345 is used as a reference. Further, the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 3343 when the stem convex portion 3343 is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the stem convex portion 3343 is from the central portion (top surface 3343C) of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion 3343. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the trunk convex portion 3343 (top surface 3343B and top surface 3343A). In the drawing, the top surface 3343C is cross-hatched.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-10 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 2D-11>
Example 2D-11 is also a modification of Example 2D-9. 91 shows a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-11. FIG. 92C shows the first electrode and the like along the arrow CC in FIG. FIG. 92D shows a schematic partial end view of FIG. 92C, and a schematic partial end view in which a part of FIG. 92C is enlarged is shown.

In Example 2D-11, the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 3344 when the branch convex portion 3344 is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion 3344 is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 3344. It has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends from the center toward the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 3344. Specifically, the top surface of the branch convex portion 3344 includes a top surface 3344B extending from the trunk convex portion 3343 and top surfaces 3344A located on both sides of the top surface 3344B. As described above, the branch convex portion 3344 has two step portions, and the top surface 3344A and the top surface 3344B become higher in this order when the concave portion 3345 is used as a reference. In the drawing, the top surface 3344B is hatched in the lateral direction. 91 and 93, the boundary between the trunk convex portion and the branch convex portion is indicated by a solid line. The height difference between the top surface 3343B and the top surface 3343A of the branch convex portion 3344 was set to 0.20 μm on average. The top surface 3343B of the trunk convex portion 3343 and the top surface 3344B of the branch convex portion 3344 are at the same level.

Except for the above points, the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-11 can be the same as the configuration and structure of the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-9, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 93, a schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device, the branch protrusion 3344 is cut along a virtual vertical plane parallel to the direction in which the branch protrusion 3344 extends. The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 3344 is such that the stepped portion descends from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 3344 toward the end of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion 3344. You can also Further, it can be combined with the trunk convex portion 3343 described in Example 2D-10. Further, the configuration and structure of the branch protrusions can also be applied to the protrusions in the liquid crystal display devices described in Examples 2D-1 to 2D-7.

<Example 2D-12>
Example 2D-12 relates to the 5E structure of the first electrode. A schematic plan view of the first electrode for one pixel constituting the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-12 is shown in FIG. In the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-12, assuming the X-axis and the Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel, specifically, each of the straight lines passing through the center of the pixel 10 and parallel to the pixel peripheral portion. Assuming an (X, Y) coordinate system with X and Y axes as
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are constituted by a trunk convex portion 3443 extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions 3444G extending from the side of the trunk convex portion 3443 toward the peripheral portion of the pixel,
A plurality of branch convex portions 3444G ₁ occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3444G ₂ occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3444G ₃ occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions 3444G ₄ occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The branch convex portion 3444G ₁₁ extending from the trunk convex portion 3443 on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant is shifted from the branch convex portion 3444G ₄₁ extending from the trunk convex portion 3443 on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant. (Preferably, they are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _X / 2)),
The branch convex portion 3444G ₁₂ extending from the trunk convex portion 3443 on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant is shifted from the branch convex portion 3444G ₂₂ extending from the trunk convex portion 3443 on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant. state is formed in the (preferably formed in a state of mutual (P _Y / 2) shifted),
The branch convex part 3444G ₂₁ extending from the trunk convex part 3443 on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant is shifted from the branch convex part 3444G ₃₁ extending from the trunk convex part 3443 on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant. (Preferably, they are formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _X / 2)),
The branch convex portion 3444G ₃₂ extending from the trunk convex portion 3443 on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant is shifted from the branch convex portion 3444G ₄₂ extending from the trunk convex portion 3443 on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant. (Preferably formed in a state shifted from each other by (P _Y / 2)). Here, P _X is the pitch of the branch convex portions along the X axis, and P _Y is the pitch of the branch convex portions along the Y axis. That is, the trunk convex portion 3443 and the branch convex portion 3444G are not line symmetric with respect to the X axis and the Y axis, but are 180 degrees rotationally symmetric (point symmetric) with respect to the center of the pixel.

Even in the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-12, the formation pitch of the branch projections 3444G along the X axis is P _X, and the formation pitch of the branch projections 3444G along the Y axis is P _Y (= P _X ), the width of the branch convex portion 3444G is (P _Y / 2 = P _X / 2), and the width of the concave portion 3445 is (P _Y / 2 = P _X / 2).

Except for the above points, the liquid crystal display device of Example 2D-12 can be configured and structured in the same manner as the liquid crystal display device described in Example 2D-1, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the present disclosure has been described based on the preferred embodiments and examples, the present disclosure is not limited to these embodiments and the like, and various modifications are possible. For example, although the VA mode liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) has been described in the embodiments and examples, the present disclosure is not necessarily limited thereto, and IPS (In) using liquid crystal having negative dielectric anisotropy is used. The present invention can also be applied to other display modes such as a Plane Switching mode and an FFS (Fringe Field Switching) mode. However, in the present disclosure, an improvement effect of particularly high response characteristics can be exhibited in the VA mode as compared with the case where the pretilt processing is not performed.

In the embodiments and examples, the transmissive liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display element) has been described. However, the present disclosure is not necessarily limited to the transmissive type, and may be a reflective type, for example. In the case of the reflection type, the pixel electrode is made of an electrode material having light reflectivity such as aluminum. The planar shape of the convex portion and the branch convex portion is not limited to the V shape described in the embodiment, and various patterns in which the convex portion and the branch convex portion extend in a plurality of directions, such as a stripe shape and a ladder shape, for example. Can be adopted. When the convex portions and branch convex portions are viewed as a whole, the planar shape of the end portions of the convex portions and branch convex portions may be linear or may be stepped. Furthermore, the planar shape of the end of each convex part or branch convex part may be linear, may be composed of a combination of line segments, or may draw a curve such as an arc. . The black matrix may be formed so that the projected image of the portion of the first substrate located between the pixels from the top of the uneven portion overlaps the projected image of the black matrix.

In the liquid crystal display device described above, the alignment restricting portion is provided only on the first substrate side. However, the first alignment restricting portion (first slit portion) is provided on the first substrate, and the second substrate is provided with the second restricting portion. An orientation regulating part (second slit part) may be provided. As an example of such a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device described below can be given. That is,
A first substrate and a second substrate,
A first electrode formed on the facing surface of the first substrate facing the second substrate;
A first orientation regulating portion provided on the first electrode;
A first alignment film covering a first electrode, a first alignment regulating portion, and a facing surface of the first substrate;
A second electrode formed on the facing surface of the second substrate facing the first substrate;
A second alignment regulating portion provided on the second electrode;
A second electrode, a second alignment regulating portion, a second alignment film covering the opposing surface of the second substrate, and
A liquid crystal layer provided between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and including liquid crystal molecules;
A liquid crystal display device in which a plurality of pixels having
In each pixel, there are a projected image of a region surrounded by the edge of the first electrode and the first alignment regulating portion, and a projected image of a region surrounded by the edge of the second electrode and the second alignment regulating portion. In the central region of the overlapping region that overlaps, the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule group in the liquid crystal layer is substantially located in the same virtual plane,
The liquid crystal molecules can have a configuration in which a pretilt is imparted by the first alignment film. Here, when the central region of the overlapping region is viewed from the normal direction of the second substrate, a liquid crystal molecule group (more specifically, the first region) occupying the central region of the overlapping region along the normal direction of the second substrate. The major axis of the liquid crystal molecule group occupying a minute columnar region from the substrate to the second substrate is substantially located in the same virtual vertical plane.

In addition, this indication can also take the following structures.
[A01] << Liquid crystal display device ... first embodiment >>
A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film includes a compound obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound having the first side chain and the second side chain,
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment,
A liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a first alignment film.
[A02] << Liquid Crystal Display Device Second Embodiment >>
A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film includes a compound obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound having the first side chain and the second side chain,
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has a structure that has a dipole moment within an angle range of more than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and induces vertical orientation,
A liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a first alignment film.
[A03] The second side chain is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, -CN, -OCF _Three , -OCHF ₂ , -CF _Three , -CHF ₂ , -CH ₂ F, -OCF ₂ CHF ₂ Or -OCF ₂ CHFCF _Three The liquid crystal display device according to [A01] or [A02], including any of the above.
[A04] << Liquid Crystal Display Device—Third Aspect >>
A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film includes a compound obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound having the first side chain and the second side chain,
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has the following structural formula (11):
A liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a first alignment film.

here,
(A) m and n are each independently 0 or 1,
(B) each ring R independently represents a phenylene group, a cycloalkylene group, a phenylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or a cycloalkylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
(C) Ring X represents a phenylene group or a cycloalkylene group,
(D) A _Four With respect to
Fluorine atom, chlorine atom, -CN, -OCF _Three , -OCHF ₂ , -CF _Three , -CHF ₂ , -CH ₂ F, -OCF ₂ CHF ₂ , And -OCF ₂ CHFCF _Three The group consisting of
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is a second group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the second group, any — (CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as the third group, provided that the alkyl group in the third group is , Any non-adjacent-(CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fourth group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the fourth group, any — (CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fifth group, provided that the alkyl group in the fifth group is , Any non-adjacent-(CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH ₂ ) — May be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
(D-1) A ₁ , A ₂ , A _Three Are all hydrogen atoms and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or m = n = 1, A _Four Is one kind of atom or group selected from the first group or the second group,
(D-2) A _Three Is a hydrogen atom, and when m = 0 and n = 0, A _Four Is a group selected from the fourth group,
(D-3) A ₁ , A ₂ , A _Three A is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and when m = 1, n = 0, or when m = 0, n = 1, or when m = n = 1, A _Four Is a hydrogen atom, one type of atom or group selected from the first group, the second group and the third group,
(D-4) A _Three Is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and m = 0, n = 0, A _Four Is a hydrogen atom, one type of atom or group selected from the first group, the fourth group and the fifth group.
[A05] The liquid crystal display device according to [A04], in which the second side chain has the following structural formula (12).

here,
(E) A ₀ Represents an alkylene group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NHCO—, —CONH—, or an alkylene-ether group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms.
[A06] The liquid crystal display device according to [A04], wherein the second side chain has the following structural formula (13).

here,
(F-1) A ₀₁ Is composed of an organic group which may contain a linear or branched divalent ether group or ester group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or ether, ester, ether ester, acetal, ketal, hemiacetal and hemiketal. Represents at least one linking group selected from the group;
(F-2) A ₀₂ Is one group selected from the group consisting of chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol and chitosan, or any one of acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, epoxy and oxetane. It represents a divalent group containing a structure or an ethynylene group.
[A07] << Liquid Crystal Display Manufacturing Method: First Aspect >>
A first alignment film composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group and a second side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates. On the other hand, after forming the second alignment film,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Crosslinking or polymerizing the first side chain in the polymer compound to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules;
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain is a method of manufacturing a liquid crystal display device having the above structural formula (11), the above structural formula (12), or the above structural formula (13).
[A08] The liquid crystal according to [A07], wherein the first side chain of the polymer compound is crosslinked or polymerized by irradiating energy rays while aligning the liquid crystal molecules by applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer. Manufacturing method of display device.
[A09] << Liquid Crystal Display Manufacturing Method ... Second Aspect >>
A first alignment film composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a photosensitive functional group and a second side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates, and a second alignment film is formed on the other of the pair of substrates. After forming the alignment film,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Deforming the first side chain of the polymer compound to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules;
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain is a method of manufacturing a liquid crystal display device having the above structural formula (11), the above structural formula (12), or the above structural formula (13).
[A10] The liquid crystal display device according to [A09], wherein the first side chain of the polymer compound is deformed by irradiating energy rays while aligning liquid crystal molecules by applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer. Manufacturing method.
[A11] << Liquid Crystal Display Manufacturing Method ... Third Aspect >>
A first alignment film composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a photosensitive functional group and a second side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates. On the other hand, after forming the second alignment film,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Irradiate the polymer compound with energy rays to give the liquid crystal molecules a pretilt,
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain is a method of manufacturing a liquid crystal display device having the above structural formula (11), the above structural formula (12), or the above structural formula (13).
[B01] << First structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [A01] to [A06], wherein the first electrode has a plurality of uneven portions.
[C01] << Second structure of first electrode >>
The first electrode is formed with a plurality of concave and convex portions,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [A01] to [A06], wherein at least a space between the recesses of the first electrode is filled with a planarizing layer. Liquid crystal display device.
[C02] The maximum height of the top surface of the planarization layer is defined as H with respect to the bottom surface of the recess. _H , The minimum height of the top surface of the planarizing layer is H _L When
0.5 ≦ H _L / H _H ≦ 1
The liquid crystal display device according to [C01] satisfying
[C03] The height of the convex portion with respect to the bottom surface of the concave portion is H _C When
0.5 ≦ H _H / H _C ≦ 5
The liquid crystal display device according to [C02] satisfying
[C04] The planarization layer covers the first electrode,
A first alignment film covering the first electrode and a second alignment film covering the second electrode;
The liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by at least the first alignment film,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C03], wherein the first alignment film corresponds to a planarization layer.
[C05] The planarization layer covers the first electrode,
A first alignment film covering the planarization layer and a second alignment film covering the second electrode;
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C03], in which a pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules at least by the first alignment film.
[C06] The planarization layer fills between the recesses of the first electrode,
A first alignment film covering the first electrode and the planarization layer, and a second alignment film covering the second electrode;
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C03], in which a pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules at least by the first alignment film.
[C07] Any of [C04] to [C06] in which a pretilt is imparted to the liquid crystal molecules by reacting at least a polymer compound constituting the first alignment film while applying a predetermined electric field to the liquid crystal layer. 2. A liquid crystal display device according to item 1.
[C08] The average film thickness of the first alignment film is T ₁ , The average film thickness of the second alignment film is T ₂ When
0.5 ≦ T ₂ / T ₁ ≦ 1.5
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C03] to [C07] that satisfies the above.
[D01] << 3A structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], wherein a plurality of stepped portions are formed on a convex portion provided on the first electrode.
[D02] << 3A-1 structure of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is a liquid crystal display device according to [D01], which includes a trunk convex portion extending through the center of the pixel and extending in a cross shape and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion.
[D03] The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to [D02], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward the surface.
[D04] The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D02] to [D03], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward the portion.
[D05] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D02] to [D04], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward the surface.
[D06] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D02] to [D05], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward the end of the substrate.
[D07] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D02] to [D06], in which an alignment regulating portion is formed in a portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion.
[D08] << 3A-2 structure of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is a liquid crystal display device according to [D01], which includes a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel.
[D09] The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion from the outer edge of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to [D08], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward an inner edge.
[D10] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D08] to [D09], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward the surface.
[D11] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D08] to [D10], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward an end of the substrate.
[D12] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D08] to [D11], wherein the first electrode is formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel.
[D13] A convex structure is formed from the portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to the portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [D02] to [D12], wherein a peripheral portion of the uneven portion is formed on a convex structure.
[E01] << 3B structure of first electrode >>
A convex structure is formed from a portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to a portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], wherein a peripheral portion of the concavo-convex portion is formed on a convex structure.
[E02] << Structure of 3B-1 of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is a liquid crystal display device according to [E01], which includes a trunk convex portion extending through the center of the pixel and extending in a cross shape and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion.
[E03] The liquid crystal display device according to [E02], wherein an alignment regulating portion is formed in a portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion.
[E04] << 3B-2 structure of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is a liquid crystal display device according to [E01], which includes a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel.
[E05] The liquid crystal display device according to [E04], wherein the first electrode is formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel.
[F01] << 3C structure of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is composed of a stem convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the stem convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], in which an alignment regulating portion is formed in a portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion.
[G01] << 3D structure of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex part is composed of a stem convex part formed in a frame shape around the pixel peripheral part, and a plurality of branch convex parts extending from the stem convex part toward the inside of the pixel,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], wherein the first electrode is formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel.
[H01] << Fourth structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], wherein a width of a part of the convex portion provided in the first electrode is narrowed toward the tip portion.
[H02] << Structure of 4A of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is composed of a stem convex portion that extends through the center of the pixel and extends in a cross shape, and a plurality of branch convex portions that extend from the stem convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion,
A plurality of branch protrusions correspond to a part of the protrusions provided on the first electrode,
The width of the branch convex portion is the widest portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion, and is narrower from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip end portion [H01].
[H03] The liquid crystal display device according to [H02], wherein the width of the branch convex portion is linearly narrowed from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip portion.
[H04] The liquid crystal display device according to [H02] or [H03], in which an alignment regulating portion is formed in a portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion.
[H05] << Structure 4B of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex part is composed of a stem convex part formed in a frame shape around the pixel peripheral part, and a plurality of branch convex parts extending from the stem convex part toward the inside of the pixel,
A plurality of branch protrusions correspond to a part of the protrusions provided on the first electrode,
The width of the branch convex portion is the widest portion of the branch convex portion joined to the trunk convex portion, and is narrower from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip end portion [H01].
[H06] The liquid crystal display device according to [H05], wherein the width of the branch convex portion is linearly narrowed from the portion joined to the trunk convex portion toward the tip portion.
[H07] The liquid crystal display device according to [H05] or [H06], wherein the first electrode is formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel.
[H08] << 4C structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to [H01], wherein a plurality of stepped portions are formed on a convex portion provided on the first electrode.
[H09] << Structure of 4C-1 of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is the liquid crystal display device according to [H08], which includes a trunk convex portion extending through the center of the pixel and extending in a cross shape and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion.
[H10] The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to [H09], which has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the surface.
[H11] The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to [H09] or [H10], which has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the portion.
[H12] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [H09] to [H11], wherein the liquid crystal display device has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward the surface.
[H13] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is the sectional shape of the branch convex portion from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [H09] to [H12], wherein the liquid crystal display device has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward an end of the substrate.
[H14] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [H09] to [H13], wherein an alignment regulating portion is formed in a portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion.
[H15] << Structure of 4C-2 of first electrode >>
The uneven portion is a liquid crystal display device according to [H08], which includes a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel.
[H16] The cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion when the stem convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the stem convex portion is the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion from the outer edge of the cross-sectional shape of the stem convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to [H15], which has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward an inner edge.
[H17] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is from the center of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to [H15] or [H16], which has a cross-sectional shape in which the stepped portion descends toward the surface.
[H18] The cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion when the branch convex portion is cut in a virtual vertical plane parallel to the extending direction of the branch convex portion is the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion from the trunk convex portion side of the cross-sectional shape of the branch convex portion. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [H15] to [H17], wherein the liquid crystal display device has a cross-sectional shape in which a stepped portion descends toward an end of the substrate.
[H19] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [H15] to [H18], wherein the first electrode is provided with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel.
[H20] A convex structure is formed from the portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to the portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [H09] to [H19], wherein a peripheral portion of the uneven portion is formed on a convex structure.
[H21] << 4D structure of first electrode >>
A convex structure is formed from a portion of the first substrate located between the pixels to a portion of the first substrate corresponding to the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The liquid crystal display device according to [H01], wherein a peripheral portion of the concavo-convex portion is formed on a convex structure.
[H22] << Structure 4D-1 of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is the liquid crystal display device according to [H21], which includes a trunk convex portion extending through the center of the pixel and extending in a cross shape and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the trunk convex portion toward the pixel peripheral portion.
[H23] The liquid crystal display device according to [H22], in which an alignment regulating portion is formed in a portion of the second electrode corresponding to the trunk convex portion.
[H24] << 4th D-2 structure of first electrode >>
The concavo-convex portion is a liquid crystal display device according to [H21], which includes a stem convex portion formed in a frame shape around the pixel and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the stem convex portion toward the inside of the pixel.
[H25] The liquid crystal display device according to [H24], wherein the first electrode is formed with a slit or a protrusion that passes through the center of the pixel and is parallel to the periphery of the pixel.
[J01] << Structure 5A of first electrode >>
Assuming an X-axis and a Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate decreases,
The plurality of convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], wherein the plurality of convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with a direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.
[J02] Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the first quadrant is joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant,
Each of the convex portions extending from the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant is joined to each of the convex portions extending from the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the second quadrant is joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis and occupying the third quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant is joined to each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant [J01].
[J03] The liquid crystal display device according to [J02], in which a joint extending between the two convex portions is provided with a protruding portion extending toward the peripheral portion of the pixel.
[J04] The liquid crystal display device according to [J03], in which the protruding portion is surrounded by a plurality of line segments.
[J05] The liquid crystal display device according to [J03], in which the protrusion is surrounded by a single curve.
[J06] The liquid crystal display device according to [J03], in which the protruding portion is surrounded by a plurality of curves.
[J07] Each of the convex portions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant extends from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and is not joined to each of the convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis or its vicinity and occupying the first quadrant is not joined to each of the protrusions extending from the Y axis or its vicinity and occupying the second quadrant,
Each of the protrusions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant is not joined to each of the protrusions extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant,
Each of the convex portions extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant extends from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and is not joined to each of the convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant. [J01] .
[J08] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [J01] to [J07], in which a width of the convex portion becomes narrower toward a peripheral portion of the pixel.
[J09] << 5A-1 structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [J01] to [J08], in which a slit portion is further formed in the first electrode.
[J10] The liquid crystal display device according to [J09], wherein the slit portion is formed in the convex region.
[J11] The liquid crystal display device according to [J10], wherein the slit portion is provided in a convex region including a central portion of the pixel.
[J12] The liquid crystal display device according to [J10], wherein a slit portion is formed in a convex region extending toward the central region of the pixel.
[J13] The liquid crystal display device according to [J10], wherein a slit portion is formed in a convex region provided in a region sandwiched between the convex portion extending toward the central region of the pixel and the Y axis.
[J14] The liquid crystal display device according to [J09], wherein a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion is formed at a top portion of the convex portion.
[J15] The liquid crystal display device according to [J09], wherein a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed at a bottom portion of the concave portion.
[J16] << 5A-2 structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [J01] to [J13], wherein a depression is provided in the first electrode in the central region of the pixel.
[J17] The liquid crystal display device according to [J16], in which the recess is narrowed toward the first substrate.
[J18] The liquid crystal display device according to [J17], in which the depression has an inclination angle of 5 degrees to 60 degrees.
[J19] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [J16] to [J18], wherein the outer edge of the recess has a circular shape.
[J20] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [J16] to [J18], wherein the outer edge of the recess has a rectangular shape.
[J21] The liquid crystal display device according to [J20], in which an angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is 90 degrees.
[J22] The liquid crystal display device according to [J20], in which the angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is an acute angle.
[J23] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [J16] to [J22], in which a central portion of the depression forms a part of the contact hole.
[J24] << 5A-3 structure of first electrode >>
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state,
The convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state,
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state,
The protrusions extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant and the protrusions extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state [J01] to [J The liquid crystal display device according to any one of J23].
[J25] P is the pitch at which the protrusions are formed along the X axis. _X And the formation pitch of the protrusions along the Y-axis is P _Y When
The convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the first quadrant and the convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) formed in a shifted state,
A convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the second quadrant and a convex portion extending from the X axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
A convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the third quadrant and a convex portion extending from the Y axis or the vicinity thereof and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) The liquid crystal display device according to [J24] formed in a shifted state.
[K01] << 5B structure of first electrode >>
Assuming an X-axis and a Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are constituted by a trunk convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the trunk convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The direction in which the side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is not parallel to the X axis and not parallel to the Y axis is described in any one of [C01] to [C08]. Liquid crystal display device.
[K02] The trunk convex portions constituting the plurality of concave and convex portions are formed in a frame shape around the pixel instead of being formed on the X axis and the Y axis. The liquid crystal display device according to [K01] .
[K03] The liquid crystal display device according to [K01] or [K02], wherein a side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is linear.
[K04] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K01] to [K03], wherein a side portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is curved.
[K05] The liquid crystal display according to any one of [K01] to [K04], wherein a width of a portion of the trunk convex portion that is not joined to the branch convex portion is narrowed toward a tip portion of the trunk convex portion. apparatus.
[K06] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K01] to [K05], wherein the width of the branch convex portion becomes narrower toward the peripheral portion of the pixel.
[K07] << 5th B-1 structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K01] to [K06], in which a slit portion is further formed in the first electrode.
[K08] The liquid crystal display device according to [K07], wherein the slit portion is formed in the convex region.
[K09] The liquid crystal display device according to [K08], wherein the slit portion is provided in a convex region including a central portion of the pixel.
[K10] The liquid crystal display device according to [K08], wherein a slit portion is formed in a convex region extending toward the center region of the pixel.
[K11] The liquid crystal display device according to [K08], in which a slit portion is formed in a convex region provided in a region sandwiched between the branch convex portion extending toward the central region of the pixel and the Y axis.
[K12] The liquid crystal display device according to [K07], in which a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion is formed at a top portion of the convex portion.
[K13] The liquid crystal display device according to [K07], wherein a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed at a bottom portion of the concave portion.
[K14] << 5th B-2 structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K01] to [K11], wherein a depression is provided in the first electrode in the central region of the pixel.
[K15] The liquid crystal display device according to [K14], in which the recess is narrowed toward the first substrate.
[K16] The liquid crystal display device according to [K15], wherein the depression has an inclination angle of 5 degrees to 60 degrees.
[K17] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K14] to [K16], wherein the outer edge of the recess has a circular shape.
[K18] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K14] to [K16], wherein the outer edge of the recess has a rectangular shape.
[K19] The liquid crystal display device according to [K18], in which an angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is 90 degrees.
[K20] The liquid crystal display device according to [K18], in which an angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is an acute angle.
[K21] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K14] to [K20], in which a central portion of the depression forms a part of the contact hole.
[K22] The plurality of branch protrusions occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K01] to [K21], wherein the plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with a direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases. .
[K23] << 5th B-3 structure of first electrode >>
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [K01] to [K22].
[K24] P is the pitch of branch protrusions along the X-axis. _X And the pitch of the branch protrusions along the Y axis is P _Y When
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
A branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and a branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) The liquid crystal display device according to [K23], which is formed in a shifted state.
[L01] << 5C structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], in which a slit portion is further formed in the first electrode.
[L02] The liquid crystal display device according to [L01], wherein the slit portion is formed in a convex region.
[L03] The liquid crystal display device according to [L02], wherein the slit portion is provided in a convex region including a central portion of the pixel.
[L04] The liquid crystal display device according to [L02], in which a slit is formed in a convex region extending toward the center region of the pixel.
[L05] The liquid crystal display device according to [L02], wherein a slit portion is formed in a convex region provided in a region sandwiched between the convex portion extending toward the central region of the pixel and the Y axis.
[L06] The liquid crystal display device according to [L01], wherein a slit portion extending in parallel with the convex portion is formed at a top portion of the convex portion.
[L07] The liquid crystal display device according to [L01], wherein a slit portion extending in parallel with the concave portion is formed at a bottom portion of the concave portion.
[L08] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [L01] to [L05], in which a width of the convex portion becomes narrower toward a peripheral portion of the pixel.
[L09] << 5th C-2 structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [L01] to [L08], wherein the first electrode in the center region of the pixel is provided with a depression.
[L10] The liquid crystal display device according to [L09], in which the recess is narrowed toward the first substrate.
[L11] The liquid crystal display device according to [L10], wherein the depression has an inclination angle of 5 degrees to 60 degrees.
[L12] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [L09] to [L11], wherein a shape of an outer edge of the recess is a circle.
[L13] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [L09] to [L11], wherein a shape of an outer edge of the recess is a rectangle.
[L14] The liquid crystal display device according to [L13], in which the angle formed by the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the direction in which the protrusion extends is 90 degrees.
[L15] The liquid crystal display device according to [L13], in which the angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is an acute angle.
[L16] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [L09] to [L15], in which a central portion of the depression forms part of a contact hole.
[L17] When the X axis and the Y axis passing through the center of the pixel are assumed,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are constituted by a stem convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the stem convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel [L01] to [L01]. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [L16].
[L18] The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The liquid crystal display device according to [L17], wherein the plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with a direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.
[L19] << 5th C-3 structure of first electrode >>
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. The liquid crystal display device according to [L18].
[L20] P is the pitch of the branch protrusions along the X-axis. _X And the pitch of the branch protrusions along the Y axis is P _Y When
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
A branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and a branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) The liquid crystal display device according to [L19], which is formed in a shifted state.
[M01] << 5D structure of first electrode >>
The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08], wherein a depression is provided in the first electrode in the central region of the pixel.
[M02] The liquid crystal display device according to [M01], in which the recess is narrowed toward the first substrate.
[M03] The liquid crystal display device according to [M02], wherein the depression has an inclination angle of 5 degrees to 60 degrees.
[M04] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [M01] to [M03], wherein a shape of an outer edge of the recess is a circle.
[M05] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [M01] to [M03], wherein the outer edge of the recess has a rectangular shape.
[M06] The liquid crystal display device according to [M05], in which an angle formed between the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is 90 degrees.
[M07] The liquid crystal display device according to [M05], in which the angle formed by the outer edge of the rectangular recess and the extending direction of the convex portion is an acute angle.
[M08] The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [M01] to [M07], in which a central portion of the depression forms part of a contact hole.
[M09] When the X axis and the Y axis passing through the center of the pixel are assumed,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are configured by a trunk convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the trunk convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [M08].
[M10] The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend in parallel with the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The liquid crystal display device according to [M09], wherein the plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel with a direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases.
[M11] << 5th D-3 structure of first electrode >>
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. The liquid crystal display device according to [M10].
[M12] P is the pitch of the branch protrusions along the X axis. _X And the pitch of the branch protrusions along the Y axis is P _Y When
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
A branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and a branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) The liquid crystal display device according to [M11], which is formed in a shifted state.
[N01] << 5th E structure of first electrode >>
Assuming an X-axis and a Y-axis passing through the center of the pixel,
The plurality of concavo-convex portions are constituted by a trunk convex portion extending on the X axis and the Y axis, and a plurality of branch convex portions extending from the side of the trunk convex portion toward the peripheral portion of the pixel,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the first quadrant extend parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate increases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the second quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value increases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the third quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the Y coordinate value decreases when the X coordinate value decreases,
The plurality of branch convex portions occupying the fourth quadrant extend in parallel to the direction in which the value of the Y coordinate decreases when the value of the X coordinate increases,
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. And
The branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and the branch convex part extending from the trunk convex part on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are formed in a mutually shifted state. The liquid crystal display device according to any one of [C01] to [C08].
[N02] P is the pitch of the branch protrusions along the X-axis. _X And the pitch of the branch protrusions along the Y axis is P _Y When
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the first quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the second quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) formed in a shifted state,
The branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the second quadrant and the branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the X axis and occupying the third quadrant are mutually (P _X / 2) formed in a shifted state,
A branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the third quadrant and a branch convex portion extending from the trunk convex portion on the Y axis and occupying the fourth quadrant are mutually (P _Y / 2) The liquid crystal display device according to [N01], which is formed in a shifted state.

10, 10A, 10B, 10C ... pixels, 20 ... first substrate (TFT substrate), 20 '... insulating film, 21 ... first alignment film, 22 ... smoothing film, 23 ... Color filter layer, 24 ... Transparent conductive material layer, 30 ... TFT layer, 31 ... Gate electrode, 32 ... Gate insulating layer, 33 ... Semiconductor layer (channel formation region), 34 ... Source / drain electrodes, 35 ... Connection holes (contact holes), 40, 140, 240, 340, 1140, 1240, 2140, 2240, 2340, 2440, 3140, 3240, 3340, 3440 ... First electrode (pixel electrode), 41, 42, 43... Flattened layer, 44... First alignment regulating portion (first slit portion), 1140A, 3340A ... First transparent conductive material layer, 1140B , 3340B ... 2nd transparent conductive material layer, 141, 241, 341, 1141, 1241, 2141, 2241, 2241, 2441, 3141, 3241, 3341, 3441 ... uneven part, 141A, 1141A ... of uneven part Peripheral part, 142, 242, 342, 1142, 1242, 2142, 2242, 2342, 2442 ... convex part, 143, 243, 343A, 343B, 1143, 1243, 2143, 2243, 2343, 2443, 3243, 3343, 3443 ... trunk convex part (main convex part), 1143A, 1143B, 1143C, 1243A, 1243B, 2343A, 2343B, 2343C, 2443A, 2443B, 2443C, 3343A, 3343B, 3343C ... top surface of the trunk convex part, 3243 ′ ・・・ Side side part of trunk convex part, 1 _{_{44,244,344,1144,1244,2144,2244,2344,2444,3144A, 3144A 1, 3144A 11,}}

3144A

12,

3144A

2,

3144A

21,

3144A

22,

3144A

3,

3144A

31,

3144A

32,

3144A

4, _{_{3144A 41, 3144A 42, 3144B,}} 3144C,

3144C

1,

3144C

11,

3144C

12,

3144C

2,

3144C

21,

3144C

22,

3144C

3,

3144C

31,

3144C

32,

3144C

4,

3144C

41,

3144C

42, 3144D, 3144D 1 _{_{, 3144D 11, 3144D 12, 3144D}} 2,

3144D

21,

3144D

22,

3144D

3,

3144D

31,

3144D

32,

3144D

4,

3144D

41,

3144D

42, 3244A, 32 _{_{_{4A 1, 3244A 11, 3244A 12}}} ,

3244A

2,

3244A

21,

3244A

22,

3244A

3,

3244A

31,

3244A

32,

3244A

4,

3244A

41,

3244A

42, 3344,3444A, 3444A 1, 3444A 11, 3444A 12, 3444A ₂ , 3444A ₂₁ , 3444A ₂₂ , 3444A ₃ , 3444A ₃₁ , 3444A ₃₂ , 3444A ₄ , 3444A ₄₁ , 3444A ₄₂ ... Branch convex part (sub-convex part), 3144B ′. 3144E '... convex part area, 1144A, 1144B, 1244A, 1244B, 2344A, 2344B, 2444A, 2444B, 3344A, 33344B ... the top surface of the branch convex part, 2144a, 2244a ... joined to the trunk convex part Branch convex part, 2144b, 2244 b: tip portion of branch convex portion, 145, 245, 345, 1145, 1245, 2145, 2245, 2345, 2445, 3145, 3245, 3345, 3445 ... concave portion, 146, 246, 346, 1146, 1246 , 2146, 2246, 2346, 2446, 3146, 3246, 3346, 3446 ... the portion of the first substrate located between the pixels, 147, 1147 ... convex structure, 1147A ... black matrix, 3151 ... Projection part, 3152, 3252 ... Slit part, 3152A ... Central region, 3153, 3253 ... Depression, 3153A ... Outer edge of depression, 50 ... Second substrate (CF substrate) , 51 ... 2nd alignment film, 60, 160 ... 2nd electrode (counter electrode), 161 ... Orientation control part, 162 ... Lit part, 163 ... Projection part (rib), 248, 1248 ... Slit part, 249, 1249 ... Projection part (rib), 70 ... Liquid crystal layer, 71, 71A, 71B, 71C ... Liquid crystal molecules, 80 ... display area, 81 ... source driver, 82 ... gate driver, 83 ... timing controller, 84 ... power supply circuit, 91 ... source line, 92 ... Gate line, 93 ... TFT (transistor), 94 ... Capacitor, A ... First side chain, B ... Second side chain, Cr ... Connector, Mc (Mc1, Mc2) , Mc3) ... main chain

Claims

A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film includes a compound obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound having the first side chain and the second side chain,
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment,
A liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a first alignment film.
A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film includes a compound obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound having the first side chain and the second side chain,
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has a structure that has a dipole moment within an angle range of more than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and induces vertical orientation,
A liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a first alignment film.
The second side chain is a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 2 CHF 2 , or —OCF 2 CHFCF 3 The liquid crystal display device according to claim 1, comprising any one of the above.
A first alignment film and a second alignment film provided on opposite surfaces of the pair of substrates, and
A liquid crystal layer including liquid crystal molecules disposed between the first alignment film and the second alignment film and having negative dielectric anisotropy;
A liquid crystal display element having
At least the first alignment film includes a compound obtained by crosslinking or polymerizing or deforming a polymer compound having the first side chain and the second side chain,
The first side chain has a crosslinkable functional group, a polymerizable functional group or a photosensitive functional group,
The second side chain has the following structural formula (11):
A liquid crystal display device in which liquid crystal molecules are given a pretilt by a first alignment film.

here,
(A) m and n are each independently 0 or 1,
(B) each ring R independently represents a phenylene group, a cycloalkylene group, a phenylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or a cycloalkylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
(C) Ring X represents a phenylene group or a cycloalkylene group,
With respect to (d) A 4,
A group consisting of fluorine atom, chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 2 CHF 2 , and —OCF 2 CHFCF 3 A group,
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is a second group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the second group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as the third group, provided that the alkyl group in the third group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fourth group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the fourth group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fifth group, provided that the alkyl group in the fifth group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
(D-1) All of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 are hydrogen atoms and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or m = n When = 1, A 4 is one kind of atom or group selected from the first group or the second group,
(D-2) When A 3 is a hydrogen atom and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is one kind of group selected from the fourth group,
(D-3) When at least one of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or , M = n = 1, A 4 is a hydrogen atom, one kind of atom or group selected from the first group, the second group and the third group,
(D-4) When A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is selected from a hydrogen atom, the first group, the fourth group, and the fifth group One kind of atom or group.
The liquid crystal display device according to claim 4, wherein the second side chain has the following structural formula (12).

here,
(E) A 0 is an alkylene group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —NHCO—, —CONH—, or an alkylene-ether group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms. Represents.
The liquid crystal display device according to claim 4, wherein the second side chain has the following structural formula (13).

here,
(F-1) A 01 is a C 1-20 linear or branched divalent organic group that may contain an ether group or an ester group, or an ether, ester, ether ester, acetal, or ketal. Represents at least one linking group selected from the group consisting of hemiacetal and hemiketal;
(F-2) A 02 is one group selected from the group consisting of chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl, coumarin, maleimide, benzophenone, norbornene, oryzanol and chitosan, or acryloyl, methacryloyl, vinyl, epoxy and oxetane. It represents a divalent group containing any one of the structures, or an ethynylene group.
A first alignment film composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a polymerizable functional group and a second side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates. On the other hand, after forming the second alignment film,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Crosslinking or polymerizing the first side chain in the polymer compound to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules;
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain is a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device having the following structural formula (11).

here,
(A) m and n are each independently 0 or 1,
(B) each ring R independently represents a phenylene group, a cycloalkylene group, a phenylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or a cycloalkylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
(C) Ring X represents a phenylene group or a cycloalkylene group,
With respect to (d) A 4,
A group consisting of fluorine atom, chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 2 CHF 2 , and —OCF 2 CHFCF 3 A group,
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is a second group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the second group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as the third group, provided that the alkyl group in the third group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fourth group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the fourth group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fifth group, provided that the alkyl group in the fifth group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
(D-1) All of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 are hydrogen atoms and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or m = n When = 1, A 4 is one kind of atom or group selected from the first group or the second group,
(D-2) When A 3 is a hydrogen atom and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is one kind of group selected from the fourth group,
(D-3) When at least one of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or , M = n = 1, A 4 is a hydrogen atom, one kind of atom or group selected from the first group, the second group and the third group,
(D-4) When A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is selected from a hydrogen atom, the first group, the fourth group, and the fifth group One kind of atom or group.
A first alignment film composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a photosensitive functional group and a second side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates, and a second alignment film is formed on the other of the pair of substrates. After forming the alignment film,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Deforming the first side chain of the polymer compound to give a pretilt to the liquid crystal molecules;
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain is a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device having the following structural formula (11).

(A) m and n are each independently 0 or 1,
(B) each ring R independently represents a phenylene group, a cycloalkylene group, a phenylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or a cycloalkylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
(C) Ring X represents a phenylene group or a cycloalkylene group,
With respect to (d) A 4,
A group consisting of fluorine atom, chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 2 CHF 2 , and —OCF 2 CHFCF 3 A group,
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is a second group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the second group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as the third group, provided that the alkyl group in the third group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fourth group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the fourth group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fifth group, provided that the alkyl group in the fifth group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
(D-1) All of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 are hydrogen atoms and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or m = n When = 1, A 4 is one kind of atom or group selected from the first group or the second group,
(D-2) When A 3 is a hydrogen atom and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is one kind of group selected from the fourth group,
(D-3) When at least one of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or , M = n = 1, A 4 is a hydrogen atom, one kind of atom or group selected from the first group, the second group and the third group,
(D-4) When A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is selected from a hydrogen atom, the first group, the fourth group, and the fifth group One kind of atom or group.
A first alignment film composed of a polymer compound having a first side chain having a crosslinkable functional group or a photosensitive functional group and a second side chain is formed on one of the pair of substrates. On the other hand, after forming the second alignment film,
A pair of substrates are disposed so that the first alignment film and the second alignment film face each other, and liquid crystal molecules having negative dielectric anisotropy are included between the first alignment film and the second alignment film. Sealing the liquid crystal layer, then
Irradiate the polymer compound with energy rays to give the liquid crystal molecules a pretilt,
Including steps,
The second side chain has a structure that induces dielectric anisotropy and a structure that induces vertical alignment, or alternatively,
The second side chain has a dipole moment in the range of angles greater than 0 degrees and less than 90 degrees from its major axis direction, and has a structure that induces vertical orientation, or alternatively
The second side chain is a method for manufacturing a liquid crystal display device having the following structural formula (11).

here,
(A) m and n are each independently 0 or 1,
(B) each ring R independently represents a phenylene group, a cycloalkylene group, a phenylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or a cycloalkylene group substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom;
(C) Ring X represents a phenylene group or a cycloalkylene group,
With respect to (d) A 4,
A group consisting of fluorine atom, chlorine atom, —CN, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 2 CHF 2 , and —OCF 2 CHFCF 3 A group,
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is a second group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the second group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic cyclic group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as the third group, provided that the alkyl group in the third group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
A group composed of a fluorine-containing alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, a fluorine-containing aromatic ring group, a fluorine-containing aliphatic ring group, a fluorine-containing heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fourth group, However, in the fluorine-containing alkyl group in the fourth group, any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —CH═CH— or —C≡C—
A group composed of an alkyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, an aliphatic ring group, a heterocyclic group, and a macrocyclic group composed of these is defined as a fifth group, provided that the alkyl group in the fifth group is Any non-adjacent — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced by —O—, —S—, —CO—, and any — (CH 2 ) — may be replaced with —CH═CH— or — May be replaced by C≡C-
(D-1) All of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 are hydrogen atoms and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or m = n When = 1, A 4 is one kind of atom or group selected from the first group or the second group,
(D-2) When A 3 is a hydrogen atom and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is one kind of group selected from the fourth group,
(D-3) When at least one of A 1 , A 2 , A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom and m = 1, n = 0, or m = 0, n = 1, or , M = n = 1, A 4 is a hydrogen atom, one kind of atom or group selected from the first group, the second group and the third group,
(D-4) When A 3 is a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and m = 0 and n = 0, A 4 is selected from a hydrogen atom, the first group, the fourth group, and the fifth group One kind of atom or group.